Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
PARTNER MAIL VS®
Voice Messaging System
Release 4
Installation and Programming
585-322-521
Comcode 107970212
Issue 1
March 1997
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Safety Instructions
WARNING:
The following list provides basic safety precautions that should always be
followed when using the system:
1. Read and understand all instructions.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
2.
3.
Unplug all telephone connections before cleaning. DO NOT use liquid
cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
4. This product should be serviced by (or taken to) a qualified repair
center when service or repair work is required.
DO NOT use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement
location.
5.
DO NOT place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table.
6.
7.
Never push objects of any kind into slots or openings as they may
touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in
a risk of fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the
product.
Avoid using this product during an electrical storm. There may be a
remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
8.
DO NOT use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the
leak.
9.
The product is provided with a three-wire grounding type plug. This is
a safety feature. DO NOT defeat the safety purpose of the grounding
type plug. DO NOT staple or otherwise attach the AC power supply
cord to building surfaces.
10.
CAUTION:
DO NOT block or cover the ventilation slots and openings. They prevent
the product from overheating. DO NOT place the product in a separate
enclosure unless proper ventilation is provided.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
■
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Interference Information
■
Lucent Technologies Warranty and Limitation of
Liability
v i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figures
2-1. Voice Messaging System Extensions for
2-3
2-2. Sample Voice Messaging System Extensions for
PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems
2-4
5-4. Dial Plan for PARTNER Plus, PARTNER II, and
PARTNER 48
5-39
5-5. Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced
Communications Systems
5-40
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Purpose
This guide provides instructions for installing, upgrading, programming,
and managing the PARTNER MAIL VS® Voice Messaging System on the
PARTNER® Plus, PARTNER II, PARTNER 48, or PARTNER Advanced
Communications System (ACS). It is intended for the technician who installs the
hardware and programs the initial system settings and for the System Manager,
the person who is responsible for managing the system on an on-going basis.
Terminology
This guide uses the following terms:
■
Voice messaging system (VMS): the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice
Messaging System.
■
Subscribers: a user who has a mailbox on the voice messaging system.
■
Communications system (CS): in most countries, Release 3.1 or later
of the PARTNER Plus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48 systems, or
Release 1.0 of the PARTNER Advanced Communications System.
In the U.K., Release 2.0 or later of the PARTNER Plus and PARTNER 48
systems.
■
System phones: the telephones specifically designed to work with the
communications system, including (where available) the PARTNER-34D,
PARTNER-18D, PARTNER-18, PARTNER 6, MLS-34D, MLS-18D,
MLS-12D, MLS-12, MLS-6, MLC-6, MDC 9000, MDW 9000, MDW 9010,
and MDW 9030P.
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Key Sequences
This guide instructs you to press key sequences on the telephone’s dialpad to
perform tasks. Each sequence includes a number. If the keys on your dialpad
also have letters, the number in the sequence is equivalent to a letter
associated with the task in English. For example, to delete a message from your
mailbox, you press [
★
] [
3
], which is equivalent to [
★
] [
D
] on the dialpad. The
numerical key sequences and their associated letter sequences are listed below
for your reference:
Delete
Help
[
[
[
★
★
★
] [
] [
] [
D
H
]
]
[
★
★
] [
] [
3
]
[
4
]
Restart
Transfer
Exit
R
]
[
★
] [
7
]
[
★
★
] [
] [
8
]
[
[
★
★
] [
] [
T
]
★
] [
X
]
[
★
] [
9
]
xi i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
How to Use This Guide
lf you are the technician, refer to the appropriate chapters to help you:
■
Install the voice messaging system hardware. Chapter 2 provides
instructions for installing and upgrading the voice messaging system
module in the communication system’s control unit. It also provides
instructions for installing the Mailbox Expansion Card.
■
■
Refresh your memory about programming. Chapter 3 offers general
programming information for both the communications system and the
voice messaging system.
Perform initial programming. Chapter 4 provides step-by-step
programming instructions for integrating the voice messaging system
with the communications system. It also provides test procedures that
you should use after installation to ensure that the system is working
properly.
■
Solve problems. Chapter 6 provides information to help you identify
and correct problems you may have with the voice messaging system.
If you are the System Manager, refer to the appropriate chapters to help you:
■
Learn about the voice messaging system. Chapter 1 describes the
voice messaging system’s features and services.
■
Learn about programming. Chapter 3 offers general programming
information for both the communications system and the voice
messaging system.
■
Manage the voice messaging system. Chapter 5 provides instructions
for changing system settings to accommodate the changing needs of the
business. It also offers guidelines for setting up and using the
receptionist’s extension.
■
Solve problems. Chapter 6 provides information to help you identify
and correct problems you may have with the voice messaging system.
to locate the information you need.
This guide contains some information about communications system features as
well as voice messaging system features. For detailed information about a
specific communications system feature, refer to the Programming and Use
guide for the communications system.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Product Safety Statements
Product safety statements are identified in this guide by a
CAUTION:
Indicates the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal
injury or properly damage if the hazard is not avoided.
WARNING:
Indicates the presence of a hazard that can cause severe or fatal
personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.
How to Comment on This Guide
A feedback form is located at the end of this guide, after the appendixes.
If the form is missing, send your comments and recommendations for
changes to Publications Manager, Lucent Technologies, 211 Mount Airy Road
(Room 2W-226), Basking Ridge, NJ 07920 (FAX 1 908 953-6912).
xi v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About This Guide
Reference Materials
In addition to this guide, the following materials are available (the order
numbers are in parentheses) for the voice messaging system:
■
Using the PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System (585-322-523)
■
Tutor Labels (585-322-510)
To order these materials, call the Lucent Technologies’ BCS Publications Center
at 1 800 457-1235 in the continental U.S. or at 1 317 361-5353.
Some of these materials also are available in other languages. For more
information about these materials or about communications system materials,
contact the BCS Publications Center, your Lucent Technologies’ Representative
or local Authorized Dealer.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
1
Contents
Attendant Service
1-8
Communications System Features Affecting Call Answer
Service
1-i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
1
The PARTNER MAIL VS Voice Messaging System is designed to work with the
communications system to automate the call handling needs of the business.
The voice messaging system:
■
Expands easily and supports four configurations to accommodate growth
and ensure optimal performance. The basic system configuration
consists of 2 voice channels (ports) and 10 mailboxes. Any one of three
optional Mailbox Expansion Cards may be installed to increase the
number of ports and/or subscribers. These configurations include:
2 ports and 20 mailboxes, 4 ports and 20 mailboxes, and 4 ports and
40 mailboxes.
■
Handles up to two calls (in the 2-port configuration) or four calls (in the
4-port configuration) simultaneously and provides service for a
predetermined number of subscribers.
■
Answers outside calls, plays a customized message prompting the caller
to press digits for the party with whom the caller wants to speak, and
efficiently routes the call to the appropriate party—all without the aid of a
receptionist.
■
Allows outside callers to hear all voice prompts and customized
messages in the language selected for the system. And in bilingual
mode, callers can choose between two languages selected for the
system.
■
Allows you to create up to two Automated Attendant Announcements
(in each language selected for the system). For example, you can offer
callers a choice of a standard business hours/location announcement or
a frequently updated announcement featuring special offers.
■
Allows callers to leave a private message if the called party does not
answer or is busy on another call, or to transfer to another system
extension or the receptionist’s extension for assistance.
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
■
Allows subscribers to retrieve messages from any touch-tone phone on
the premises or from a remote location. And the system informs
subscribers how many of these messages are new and how many are
old (previously saved) messages.
■
■
■
Allows subscribers to forward messages with comment to one or more
mailboxes on the system.
Allows System Managers to implement the language that subscribers
choose for their own mailbox use.
Allows subscribers to have the system “outcall” a specific telephone or
pager number according to a predefine schedule whenever a new
message is received. (Note that this feature is available to subscribers
only when it is administered for them by their System Manager.)
■
Provides after-hours service in addition to daytime service.
NOTE:
Outcalling, Automated Attendant Announcements, and Message Forward
features are introduced with this new release of PARTNER MAIL VS. The
ability to expand the standard 2-port, 10-mailbox configuration to any one
of three other configurations with the installation of the appropriate
Mailbox Expansion Card is also a new feature of Release 4.
In addition, the voice messaging system offers a built-in Tutor feature, which is
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Tutor Feature
Tutor is an “on-line help” feature that allows users to easily access and listen to
information about commonly-used communications system features. Any user
can access the Tutor—users do not have to be voice messaging system
subscribers.
Tutor provides information about the following subjects:
■
System phone features such as ringing patterns, volume control,
speakerphone, display, buttons, and lights.
■
Various types of internal calls including group paging calls, voice
interrupt on busy calls, and hands-free answer on intercom calls.
■
System features such as Conference, Transfer, Auto Dialing, Personal
Speed Dialing, Last Number Redial, and Save Number Redial.
To access the Tutor menu, users simply make a call to the voice messaging
system. The system plays:
Please enter extension
Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS.
to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4.
and #. Otherwise,
When users dial [
★
] [ ], they hear instructions for using Tutor, followed by a list of
4
topics and subtopics. The user can then enter the topic and subtopic numbers
and subtopic numbers.
Instruction labels, which are designed for placement in the handset cradle on
the base of the system phone, are shipped with the voice messaging system
hardware.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Languages
The voice messaging system supports multiple languages. You can choose to
have outside callers hear all voice prompts and customized messages in one of
the supported languages (Monolingual Mode) or you can let outside callers
choose between two languages preselected for the system by the System
Manager (Bilingual Mode).
When the system operates in Monolingual Mode, the language you choose for
voice prompts is referred to as the System Language. When the system
operates in Bilingual Mode, the language you choose for voice prompts when
calls are first answered is referred to as the Primary Language. Outside callers
then have the option of switching to the Secondary Language for the remainder
of the call.
Voice Messaging Services
The voice messaging system provides three types of service:
■
Automated Attendant Service. Answers outside calls and transfers
them to the destination selected by the caller or plays an Announcement
selected by the caller.
■
Call Answer Service. Allows the caller to leave a message or to transfer
to another extension if the called party is busy or does not answer.
■
Voice Mail Service. Allows subscribers to listen to messages and
manage their own mailbox.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
PARTNER MAIL VS
Voice Messaging System
Automated Attendant Service
Call Answer Service
Voice Mail Service
Prompts caller to make a choice
from a menu of options, then
transfers the call to the selected
destination, or announcements.
Prompts caller to leave a message
or transfer to another extension
when the called party does not
answer.
Allows subscribers to:
■
Listen to messages
■
Forward messages with
comment to other mailboxes
Delete messages
■
■
Set up outcalling to a pager or
telephone number
Record personal greeting(s)
■
■
Change their password
VMS Hunt Schedule
Always
VMS Extension
Coverage
VMS Line
Coverage
Day Only
Voice Mailbox
Transfer
Night Only
Communications
Communications
system routes
Calls to Auto-
mated Attendant
Service when
Night Service is
off.
Communications
system routes
calls to Auto-
mated Attendant
Service when
Night Service is
on.
Caller hears the
called party’s
personal greet-
ing and can leave
a message.
Caller hears the
line owner’s
personal greet-
ing and can leave
a message.
System users
press a button to
transfer callers
directly to a
voice
mailbox without
ringing the
system always
routes calls to
Automated
Attendant
Service.
extension first.
VMS Hunt Delay
Send All Calls
Immediate
Delayed
Manual
Automatic
Call Handling
VMS Coverage
VMS Coverage
Call Handling
Automated Attendant
The receptionist answers
outside calls. Calls not
answered by the third ring
go to the Automated
Subscribers
Subscribers can
turn voice mail
coverage on and
off at their
Subscribers can use Do
Not Disturb in conjunc-
tion with automatic or
manual VMS coverage.
Doing so enables callers
to receive Call Answer
Service immediately—
calls do not ring the
extension first
Service answers outside
calls immediately. The
receptionist acts as a back
-up for unanswered calls.
have voice mail
coverage on all
the time at their
Extension.
Attendant Service.
Extension.
Figure 1-1. Voice Messaging Services
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Automated Attendant Service
The Automated Attendant Service can answer and route outside calls without
assistance from a receptionist. After an outside call is answered, the Automated
Attendant Service plays a customized message (called the menu prompt).
Typically the message welcomes callers—to let them know they have reached
the correct number—then offers callers a menu of options for transferring to the
desired party or listening to an Announcement. (It is recommended that the
menu offer not more than five options to avoid confusing callers.)
You can record up to two Announcements in Monolingual Mode (or up to two
Announcements for each language in Bilingual Mode). Announcements are
often used to answer frequently asked questions, such as business hours and
location, emergency service, special offers, etc. Each Announcement can be up
to four minutes in length. Callers can choose to listen to these Announcements,
so your staff has more time to answer other calls and perform other tasks.
You can customize the menu prompt for use during normal business hours
(called the Day Menu Prompt) and for use after normal business hours (called
the Night Menu Prompt). For example, you can set up Automated Attendant
Service so that callers hear the following prompt during the day if the system is
set for Monolingual Mode and the System Language is U.S. English:
Thank you for calling the ANY Travel Agency.
If you
dial it now or press 0 to
For information on this
know the extension you want,
speak with the receptionist.
month’s special travel package, press 3.
to ANY Travel Agency, press 4.
For directions
To speak to an agent
about Corporate Travel, press 5. Press * 4 to replay
this message.
Note that callers who want general information regarding the current discount
travel package or agency location can choose to listen to an Announcement.
For example, when callers press [ 3 ] they hear the following Announcement:
Are you tired of battling the ice, snow, and after-
Christmas sale crowds? Take advantage of our January
sunny escape package-3 days and 2 nights in San Juan,
Puerto Rico for $439 per person, including hotel and
To speak to an agent about this package or
airfare.
other winter getaways, press * 8 and extension 13.
For after-hours callers, you can set up Automated Attendant Service to play this
prompt:
Our hours are 8
Please press 9 to leave a
You have reached the ANY Travel Agency.
to 5, Monday through Friday.
message and we will return your call when the office
opens.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
For a system set for Bilingual Mode, the Day Menu Prompt should let callers
know that they can switch from the Primary Language to the Secondary
Language. Note that callers can also press [
★
] [ ] while listening to an
1
Automated Attendant Announcement to switch between the Primary and
Secondary Languages. In the following example, the Primary Language is Latin
American Spanish and the Secondary Language is U.S. English:
Gracias por llamar a Software México. For English,
press * 1. Si usted tiene teléfono de tonos y conoce
el número de extensión, marquelo ahora. De lo contrario,
espere a ser atendido por nuestra operadora.
For after-hours callers, you can set up Automated Attendant Service to play this
prompt:
Gracias por llamar a Software México. For English, press
* 1. Nuestro horario de oficina es de 9 a 14:30 horas y
de 16 a 18 horas.
Si usted tiene teléfono de tonos y
conoce el número de la extensión a la que desea llamar,
marquelo ahora. De lo contrario, espere y deje un
mensaje con la operadora.
NOTE:
When the system is installed initially, Automated Attendant Service has
this factory-set Day Menu Prompt:
Hello, welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Please enter the
extension number of the person you wish to reach or
press 0 to reach the receptionist.
ln addition, Automated Attendant Service has this factory-set Night Menu
Prompt:
Good Evening. Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Please enter
the extension number of the person you wish to reach, or
press 9 to leave a message with the receptionist.
Automated Attendant Service is useful for many businesses, such as car
dealerships, insurance agencies, and stores. For example, a car dealership can
use Automated Attendant Service to allow its customers to reach the customer
service department directly. This frees sales people to handle customer
transactions while the Automated Attendant Service transfers service calls to the
appropriate department. ln this case, the Automated Attendant Service can be
programmed to prompt the caller to enter a single digit to reach any available
customer service representative.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Communications System Features Affecting
Automated Attendant Service
When planning Automated Attendant Service, you must choose settings for the
following communications system features:
■
Group Call Distribution. Specifies the outside lines that are to be
answered by Automated Attendant Service.
■
VMS Hunt Schedule. Specifies when the communications system is to
route calls to the Automated Attendant Service.
■
VMS Hunt Delay. Specifies whether the Automated Attendant Service is
to provide immediate or delayed call handling.
■
Transfer Return Extension. Specifies how unanswered calls are
transferred by the voice mail system.
Each of these features is explained briefly below. For more information about
these communications system features, see the Programming and Use guide
for your communications system.
Group Call Distribution
This feature lets you specify the outside lines for which you want Automated
Attendant Service coverage. You can specify some or all of your lines.
VMS Hunt Schedule
This feature determines when the communications system is to route calls to the
Automated Attendant Service. VMS Hunt Schedule works in conjunction with
the communication system’s Night Service feature so that the voice messaging
system can play the appropriate menu prompt. In other words, the menu
prompt the caller hears depends on the VMS Hunt Schedule setting you select
and the status of the Night Service button at the receptionist’s extension.
You can choose one of the following VMS Hunt Schedule settings:
■
Always (factory setting). Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant
Service all the time. When Night Service is off, the Day Menu Prompt
plays; when Night Service is on, the Night Menu Prompt plays.
■
Day Only. Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service only
when Night Service is off. The Day Menu Prompt plays.
■
Night Only. Routes outside calls to Automated Attendant Service only
when Night Service is on. The Night Menu Prompt plays.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
VMS Hunt Delay
This option specifies either immediate or delayed call handling(see Figure 1-2):
■
Immediate (factory setting). The Automated Attendant Service answers
outside calls on the second ring and plays the Day or Night Menu
Prompt. The receptionist can act as backup. Callers using rotary phones
or callers requesting assistance can be transferred to the receptionist’s
extension.
■
Delayed. The Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls after
the fourth ring. This delay gives the receptionist time to answer the call.
The VMS Hunt Delay setting you select is used for both day and night
operation.
Immediate Call Handling
Incoming Calls
Control Unit
PARTNER MAIL VS
answers on
the second ring
Receptionist
backs up
PARTNER MAIL VS
Delayed Call Handling
Incoming Calls
Control Unit
Receptionist
answers incoming
PARTNER MAIL VS
picks up unanswered
calls on the fourth ring
calls
Figure 1-2. Immediate and Delayed Call Handling
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Transfer Return Extension
For extensions associated with the mail system unit, this option specifies how
unanswered calls are transferred by the voice mail system.
If the mail system transfers a call to an extension that has no Voice Mail
coverage, or if Voice Mail coverage is Off, and that extension does not answer,
the communications system transfers the call to the Transfer Return Extension.
For extensions that do not have Voice Mail coverage, this option can be
programmed to ensure that unanswered calls transferred by the mail system
return to the designated extension, where they ring until answered.
Automated Attendant Service Scenarios
The following sample scenarios illustrate typical ways in which Automated
Attendant Service is set up with the communications system features:
■
Case 1: The receptionist is the primary call handler. Automated
Attendant Service handles overflow.
a.
Use Group Call Distribution (#206) Setting 1 to identify the lines to be
answered by Automated Attendant Service.
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to Always.
b.
c. Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to Delayed.
■
Case 2: Automated Attendant Service is the primary call handler.
a.
Use Group Call Distribution (#206) Setting 1 to identify the lines to be
answered by Automated Attendant Service.
b. Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to Always.
c.
d.
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to Immediate.
Set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Assigned for all PARTNER
MAIL VS extensions. (When VMS Hunt Delay is set to Immediate, you
can use this feature to prevent users from accidentally picking up
calls sent to the voice mail system.)
■
Case 3: The receptionist answers calls during the day; Automated
Attendant Service answers calls at night.
a.
Use Group Call Distribution (#206) Setting 1 to identify the lines to be
answered by Automated Attendant Service.
b.
c.
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to Night Only.
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to Immediate.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Music On Hold
If you use Automated Attendant Service, you also may want to use the
communications system’s Music On Hold feature. When Music On Hold is
Active and an audio source is connected to the system, callers waiting to be
transferred hear music or recorded material. If Music On Hold is Not Active,
callers hear tones, ringing, or silence (depending on how the communications
system is set up) while they are being transferred.
For more information, see Music On Hold and Ring on Transfer in the
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
Call Answer Service
This service offers callers the following options when they reach an extension
that is unable to answer their call:
■
If the system is in Bilingual Mode, press [
★
] [ ] while listening to the
1
personal greeting to switch between the Primary and Secondary
Languages.
■
■
Leave a detailed, confidential message in the called party’s mailbox.
Press [
Press [
0
] to transfer to the receptionist’s extension for assistance.
] [ ] to transfer to another system extension.
■
★
8
Callers can press [
0
] or [
★
] [ ] before, during, or after leaving a message.
8
NOTE:
Until subscribers record a personal greeting for their mailbox, outside
callers hear this factory-set message in either the System Language
(Monolingual Mode) or the Primary Language (Bilingual Mode):
To leave a message,
After recording hang up or press 1
Extension XX is not available.
wait for the tone.
for more options.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Communications System Features Affecting Call
Answer Service
Call Answer Service works with the following communications system features:
■
VMS Extension Coverage
■
Do Not Disturb
■
Line Coverage
■
Each of these features is explained briefly below. For more information on these
communications system features, see the Programming and Use guide for your
communications system.
VMS Extension Coverage
VMS Extension Coverage may be either automatic or manual.
■
Automatic VMS Coverage: When the communications system’s
Automatic VMS Cover feature is Assigned for an extension, intercom and
transferred callers can leave messages or transfer to another extension
when the called person does not answer by the fourth ring (or by the
number of rings specified with the communications system’s VMS Cover
Rings (#117)* feature). The system greets the caller with the subscriber’s
personal greeting (or with the system greeting if a personal greeting is
not recorded). If the system is in Bilingual Mode and the subscriber
recorded a personal greeting in two languages, the caller can switch
between the two languages by pressing [
★
] [ ].
1
■
Manual VMS Coverage: Regardless of the Automatic VMS Cover
setting, the communications system allows subscribers to press a
programmed button to turn voice mail coverage on and off at their
extension. To make this possible, the VMS Cover feature must be
programmed on a button with lights on the subscriber’s system phone.
Do Not Disturb
The Do Not Disturb button can be used to prevent calls for the extensions from
audibly alerting (lights still flash). Subscribers (with communications system 4.0
or later) who have VMS Extension Coverage—either automatic or manual—can
use this communications system feature when they want calls sent to their
mailboxes immediately.
Line Coverage
Line Coverage lets callers who call in on a covered line leave messages in the
mailbox of a specific subscriber (known as the owner of the covered line). When
a call comes in on a covered line, the system routes the caller directly to the line
owner’s mailbox if the call is not answered. The caller has the option of leaving a
message or transferring to another extension.
*
VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide
for the communications system.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Line ownership typically is assigned to personal lines or to lines to be used for
outside access to the voice messaging system when Automated Attendant
Service is not used. (Lines in the system can be assigned either Line Coverage
or Automated Attendant Service coverage—a single line cannot be assigned
both types of coverage.)
Voice Mailbox Transfer
A Voice Mailbox Transfer button can be programmed on a user’s phone to
transfer callers directly to a subscriber’s mailbox without ringing the extension
first. This feature is useful when a user is handling calls for a subscriber who is
not at his or her desk.
Voice Mail Service
This service allows subscribers to manage their own mailboxes. With it, a
subscriber can:
■
Listen to messages, then save or delete them.
■
■
Record a personal greeting (in Bilingual Mode, the user may record his
or her personal greeting in both the Primary and Secondary Languages)
Change the default password for his or her mailbox to ensure that
messages are kept confidential.
■
■
Forward messages with comment to another subscriber’s mailbox
Have the system outcall a specified telephone or pager number
according to a predefined schedule whenever a new message is
received.
■
Transfer to another extension or to the receptionist’s extension.
A subscriber’s extension number and mailbox number are the same. When a
caller leaves a message, the voice messaging system places the message in
the subscriber’s mailbox and turns on the message light (if available) at the
subscriber’s phone. If the subscriber has Outcalling privileges, the system will
call the programmed telephone or pager number if the message is received
during the hours specified in the subscriber’s Outcalling schedule and
Outcalling is turned on.
Subscribers can retrieve messages at their convenience from any touch-tone
phone either while on-site or from an off-site location. The system informs
subscribers of the number of new and old (saved) messages in their mailboxes,
and plays new messages first. Subscribers can refer to Using PARTNER MAIL
VS® for instructions on recording a personal greeting, changing a password,
forwarding a message, specifying a telephone or pager number and schedule
for Outcalling, and performing other Voice Mail Service procedures.
Voice Mail Service also allows the System Manager to program the voice
for more information.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
When subscribers call into the Voice Mail Service, they hear this factory-set
prompt in either the System Language (Monolingual Mode) or the Primary and
Secondary Language (Bilingual Mode):
Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS.
Please enter extension
and #. Otherwise,
to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4.
The System Manager can change, on a per mailbox basis, the language
subscribers hear after they access their mailboxes. The Mailbox Language is
used for voice prompts for recording a personal greeting, retrieving messages,
and other Voice Mail services. The Mailbox Language can be different from the
System Language selected in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary
Languages selected in Bilingual Mode.
Mailboxes
The voice messaging system provides a predetermined number of mailboxes
which are assigned to extensions in order beginning with extension 10.
For example, the system may have 10 default mailboxes for extensions 10
through 19. If a Mailbox Expansion Card is installed, the number of default
mailboxes is increased; for example, installation of a Mailbox Expansion Card
could increase the number of default mailboxes to 20, for extensions 10 through
29. Mailbox Expansion Cards can also allow for configurations consisting of four
ports and 20 mailboxes, and four ports and 40 mailboxes.
The System Manager can change default mailbox assignments. First, delete
mailboxes for any extensions that do not require voice mail coverage. Then,
create mailboxes for extensions that need them. Note that the mailbox assigned
to extension 10, the receptionist’s extension, cannot be deleted.
NOTE:
Mailboxes should be deleted from extensions that connect auxiliary
equipment (such as fax machines or doorphones) to keep the maximum
number of mailboxes available for users and to safeguard system
security.
Guest Mailboxes
The System Manager can create guest mailboxes for users who do not have
their own phone, but still require mailboxes. If this is the case, either the
Automated Attendant Service or system users can transfer a caller directly to
the guest mailbox where the caller can leave a message. Guests can call the
voice messaging system from any touch-tone phone to retrieve their messages.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
Security
The System Manager is responsible for the security of the system. It is important
that you fully understand and appropriately administer this product to reduce
your risk of incurring charges that result from unauthorized use of the system.
Under the law, you, the customer are responsible for paying part or all of those
unauthorized calls.
Be aware that criminals called hackers may attempt to gain unauthorized
access to your communications system and your voice mail system. Hackers
often try to trick a company’s employees into providing them with access to an
outside line or an outside operator. They may also concentrate their activities in
two areas related to the mail system:
■
They try to dial into a mailbox, then execute a transfer by dialing [
★
] [ ].
8
Then they dial an access code, followed by a digit string to either direct
dial or access a network operator to complete the call.
■
They try to locate unused or unprotected mailboxes and use them as
drop-off points for their own messages.
System Security Guidelines
To reduce the risk of unauthorized use of your communications and voice mail
systems, you should
■
require that the System Manager’s Password be changed from the
factory setting. Use a hard-to-guess value.
■
■
delete any unused mailboxes immediately.
require all employees who have voice mailboxes to use passwords to
protect their mailboxes.
■
■
permit no Outcalling or permit this privilege only for those with legitimate
business need.
advise subscribers to change their passwords (a 4-digit password is
recommended) when they log into the Voice Mail Service for the first time
and frequently thereafter. Subscribers can refer to the instructions for
changing their passwords in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS®.
■
familiarize yourself with the impact of the Outcalling feature on system
performance and security. If Outcalling is not permitted on the system,
Outgoing Call Restriction should be set to Inside Only for the voice mail
system extensions. It is strongly recommended that you use the
communications system Call Restriction features (that is, Outgoing Call
Restriction used with Allowed and Disallowed Lists) to restrict Outcalling
■
monitor your call reporting system records of outgoing calls to identify
possible system abuse.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
You should also
■
provide effective physical security for the room containing your
telecommunications equipment and the room with administrative tools,
records, and System Administration information. These areas should be
locked when unattended.
■
provide a secure trash disposal for all sensitive information, including
your company’s telephone directories, call accounting records, or
anything that may supply information about your communications system.
This trash should be shredded.
Security Policy and User Education
As part of your responsibility for protecting system security, you should
establish and communicate security policies for all system users. You should
let users know what measures they should take to protect system security and
explain how hackers may try to gain access to the system. In particular, you
should provide users with the following information:
■
All reports of trouble, requests to move extensions, or any other
administrative details associated with the communications system or the
voice mail system should be handled by one person (the System
Manager) or within one department. Anyone claiming to be a telephone
company representative should be referred to this person or department.
■
If a caller claims to be an authorized telephone company representative,
verify his or her identity before permitting that person any access to the
system.
■
Establish well-controlled policies for passwords:
— Establish a specific date for changing passwords (for example, the
first of each month) and help users remember to do it.
— Advise subscribers to use a 4-digit password.
— Tell users that passwords should not be recycled. They should be
hard to guess and should not contain:
■
all the same numbers (for example, 4444)
■
sequential characters (for example, 1234)
■
personal information that can be associated with them (such as
their name, birthdate, telephone number, or social security number)
— Discourage the practice of writing down passwords. If a password
needs to be written down, keep it in a secure place and never discard
it while it is still active.
Tell users never to program passwords onto Auto Dial buttons. Display
phones reveal the programmed numbers.
—
■
Educate employees that hackers may try to trick them into providing
them with dial tone or dialing a number for them.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
■
Ask users to tell you if any of the following suspicious activity occurs:
—
—
—
—
inability to log into Voice Mail
lost mail messages or altered greetings
inability to get an outside line
series of calls where there is silence on the other end or the caller
hangs up
—
sudden increase in wrong numbers
— caller complaints that your lines are busy
—
—
—
callers claiming to represent the “phone” company. Ask for a callback
number.
callers trying to obtain sensitive information or asking for assistance in
placing outside or long-distance calls. Ask for a callback number.
increases in internal requests for assistance in making outside calls
(particularly international calls or requests for dial tone).
■
■
Make users with Outcalling privileges aware of the potential risks and
their responsibilities.
Never distribute the office telephone directory to anyone outside the
company.
■
■
Collect old office telephone directories and shred them.
Never discuss your telephone system’s numbering plan with anyone
outside your company.
■
Any time a call appears to be suspicious, call the Technical Service
Center at 1 800 628-2888 (in the U.S.).
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2
This chapter provides instructions for installing the voice messaging system’s
hardware in the communications system’s control unit.
Before You Start
system and communications system hardware. Then
■
Make sure the communications system control unit, processor module(s),
and line/extension modules have been installed.
■
Make sure this installation meets the environmental and electrical
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
Installing the PARTNER MAIL VS
Module
To install the voice messaging system module in the communications system’s
control unit:
1.
Turn off power to the communications system’s control unit: either pull out
the main circuit breaker on the upper right rear corner of the control unit
or move the on/off switch to the “off” position, or remove the power cord
from the AC outlet.
CAUTION:
Failure to turn off power may damage the control unit and/or the
voice messaging system.
Install the voice messaging system module in the first available slot to the
right of the last installed 206 or 400 module. Do not install the voice
messaging system module in the first slot of the PARTNER Plus system
control unit or the PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system primary carrier
2.
NOTE:
The voice messaging system module should always be installed
after the 206 and 400 modules to ensure consecutive extension
numbering. If the control unit is upgraded with more 206 or 400
modules, the voice messaging system module should be removed,
the new modules should be installed, and the voice messaging
system module should be replaced in the first available slot after
the 206 and 400 modules. The VMS Hunt Group Extensions
and Transfer Return Extensions must then be reprogrammed
On the PARTNER Advanced Communications System, you must install
the voice messaging system module in the slot to the right of the
PARTNER ACS module in the 2-slot carrier. If your system has a 5-slot
carrier, you may install the voice messaging system module in any slot
Push slowly but firmly in the center of the module until the module locks
into place, and is attached to the rear of the backplane. Do not force the
module. If it does not insert easily, remove the module, clear any
obstruction, and reinsert it.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
the System Planner for the communications system.
3.
PARTNER Plus Control Unit or
PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 Primary Carrier
PARTNER II or PARTNER 48
Expansion Carrier
If PARTNER MAIL VS
Is Installed In Slot:
1
4
4
2
3
3
2
2-port
Systems
Then Assign These
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:
26,27 32,33 38,39 44,45 50,51 56,57
20,21
If PARTNER MAIL VS
Is Installed In Slot:
2
3
2
3
4
1
4
4-port
Systems
42, 43, 48, 49, 54, 55,
30, 31, 36, 37,
24, 25,
Then Assign These
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:
18, 19,
20,21
38, 39 44, 45
56, 57
50, 51
26, 27 32, 33
Figure 2-1. Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER Plus,
PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
2-Slot Carrier
5-Slot Carrier
ACS
ACS
Processor
Module
Processor
Module
Line
Jacks
Line
Jacks
Extension
Jacks
Extension
Jacks
If PARTNER MAIL VS
Is Installed In Slot:
If PARTNER MAIL VS
Is Installed In Slot:
3
2
4
2
1
2-port
Systems
2-port
Systems
34, 35 40, 41
28, 29
Then Assign These
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:
22, 23
22,23
Then Assign These
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:
If PARTNER MAIL VS
Is Installed In Slot:
If PARTNER MAIL VS
Is Installed In Slot:
1
4
2
3
2
4-port
Systems
4-port
Systems
32, 33, 38, 39,
34, 35 40, 41
Then Assign These
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:
20, 21, 26, 27,
22, 23 28, 29
Then Assign These
Exts. To Hunt Group 7:
20, 21,
22, 23
Figure 2-2. Sample Voice Messaging System Extensions for PARTNER
Advanced Communications Systems
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
(Reserved for
Future Use)
RS-232 Port
(Factory Use Only)
Power Indicator
(Green) LED
Slot for Optional Mailbox
Expansion Card
Test (Yellow) LED
Status (Red) LED
Hard Disk Drive
(Green) LED
Figure 2-3. Installing the Mailbox Expansion Card
4. To install the Mailbox Expansion Card, insert the card in the vertical
slot on the lower front of the voice messaging system module
(see Figure 2-3). Make sure the arrows on the Mailbox Expansion Card
label face up and in. Also make sure the card is pushed in all the way.
Turn on power to the control unit. The green Power LED should light—if it
does, skip to Step 6. If the green Power LED does not light, power down
the control unit, reseat the voice messaging system module, then power
up the control unit again. If the green Power LED still does not light, call
for support as indicated on the inside front cover of this guide.
5.
6.
Next, the voice messaging system module performs self-diagnostic tests.
The LEDs work as follows:
S t a t e
ON
ON
LED
Green Power
Yellow Test
Red Status
ON for approximately 2 seconds
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation
7. After approximately 10 seconds when the tests are completed, the yellow
Test LED goes off. When this occurs, check the red Status LED:
If the red Status LED is not lit, the module passed the tests. Continue
with Step 8.
—
— If the red Status LED is lit, power down the control unit, re-install the
Mailbox Expansion Card if it was installed in Step 4, then power up the
control unit again. If the red Status LED comes on again, call for
support as indicated on the inside front cover.
After the module passes the self-diagnostic tests, the extensions
associated with the voice messaging system module go off-hook. Two
outside lines show red steady on system phones with those lines for
about one minute. When the lines become idle, the voice messaging
system is ready to receive calls.
8.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding Programming
3
Contents
3-i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding Programming
3
This chapter provides general programming information for the communications
system and the voice messaging system. Both systems must be programmed
so they can work together as an integrated unit. Before you begin any
programming, you must ensure that all required communications system and
voice messaging system planning forms described in this chapter are
completed. You will refer to these forms during programming.
Communications System
Programming
When the communications system is installed, it uses factory settings that
reflect the most common usage of the equipment. You can change these
settings as required to customize them for the business.
You can program the communications system from extension 10. Some systems
also allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use
guide for the communications system for more information. If your system
supports programming from both extensions, you may find it more convenient
to program from extension 11. This capability allows the receptionist to continue
handling calls at extension 10 while you program.
System Programming changes settings for the system as a whole, or for
individual lines or extensions. (Refer to the Programming and Use guide for the
communications system for more information about System Programming
options.)
On some communications systems, a password may be required to enter
System Programming mode. Check the Programming and Use guide for the
communications system for more information.
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding Programming
Planning Forms
Refer to the communications system’s System Planner when you are changing
system settings, and be sure to record any changes you make. The following
forms from the System Planner contain information about the voice messaging
system:
■
Form A: System Configuration. Contains basic information about the
system including the line number and type of voice messaging service
required for each line.
■
Form B1: System Extensions. Contains basic information about each
extension. This includes the type of phone or auxiliary equipment at the
extension, and the name of the user or a description of how the extension
is used.
■
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings. Contains feature settings,
such as Automatic VMS Cover and Automatic Extension Privacy, and
group assignments for each extension.
■
Form C: Button Assignments. Specifies which features are
programmed on buttons for each extension. This includes VMS Cover,
Do Not Disturb, Voice Mailbox Transfer, and Voice Mail Messages
buttons.
Samples of these forms and instructions for completing them are included in
Using System Programming
System Programming requires a system display phone at extension 10
(or 11 if available), with a programming overlay placed over the phone’s
dialpad. System Programming procedures are identified by # and a 3-digit
code (for example, the procedure code for System Date is #101).
You can program the system in one of two ways:
■
Direct Method. You access a programming procedure directly by
dialing the code for that procedure. This method works best when you
are using only a few procedures during the programming session, and
you know the codes. For example, press [
system date.
#
] [
1
] [
0
] [ ] to change the
1
■
Cycle Method. You cycle through a sequence of procedures in
numerical order by pressing [ Next Procedure ] or [ Prev Procedure ]. You should
use this method when programming the communications system for the
first time, or when you are changing a series of related settings.
However, procedures #399, #609, and #728 are skipped when you cycle
through procedures.
NOTE:
You can talk on the telephone while you program. This is useful if you
need to call for support while programming. However, you must place the
call before you enter programming mode, and you must use the handset
(not the speakerphone) to talk.
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding Programming
The Programming Overlays
During System Programming, the normal functions of several buttons on the
phone at extension 10 (or 11 if available) change. For example, left [ Intercom ]
becomes [ System Program ], which is the button used to enter programming mode.
To identify these buttons while programming, place the appropriate
programming overlay provided with the system over the dialpad of the phone at
extension 10 or 11.
Use the following special buttons while programming:
■
■
[
Next Procedure ] and [ Prev Procedure ] cycle forward and backward through the
programming procedures.
[
Next Item ] and [ Prev Item ] cycle forward and backward through a procedure's
parameters. A parameter is typically an outside line, an extension, or a
telephone list entry.
■
[
Next Data ] and [ Prev Data ] cycle forward and backward through the valid list
entries. These buttons work only for fixed data, such as a line or
extension number. They do not work for variable data such as date, time,
password, telephone numbers, or doorphone assignments.
■
■
[
Remove ] returns the current setting to the factory setting.
[ Enter ] ends an entry of variable length, such as a telephone number in an
Allowed Phone Number List.
■
■
[
System Program ] starts the System Programming process.
[
Central Tel Program ] starts the Centralized Telephone Programming process
(that is, customizing individual telephones from extension 10, or 11
if available).
■
[
Feature ], when followed by [
0
] [ ], enters or exits programming mode.
0
Programming Mode
To enter programming mode:
1. At extension 10 (or 11 if available), make sure the programming overlay
is in place over the system phone’s dialpad.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ ].
0
Press [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
Enter the System Password, if required.
Enter specific programming procedure codes.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding Programming
Voice Messaging System
Programming
Before you program the voice messaging system, obtain completed copies of
planning forms for the communications system and the voice messaging
system. These forms provide the names, extensions, mailboxes and other
information required to program the voice messaging system.
Planning Forms
You need the following forms for the voice messaging system:
■
Form 1: Language. Shows the Language Mode, Monolingual or
Bilingual. Also specifies the System Language for Monolingual Mode or
the Primary and Secondary Language for Bilingual Mode.
■
Form 2: Mailbox Assignments. Shows factory-set mailbox assignments
with and without the Mailbox Expansion Card. Allows you to change
mailbox assignments, to indicate whether Outcalling capability is
assigned, and to identify the language used for each mailbox.
■
Form 3: Menu Definition. Shows transfer options for Automated
Attendant Service. Allows you to specify the extension or group number
for a selector code transferor announcement number and to provide a
description of that extension or group.
■
or Primary Language. Shows the announcement number(s) and the
script used to record the associated announcement(s) in the System
Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual
Mode. You can record up to two announcements in Monolingual Mode
and in the Primary Language for Bilingual Mode.
■
Language. Used only if the system is set for Bilingual Mode. Shows the
announcement number(s) and the script used to record the associated
announcement(s) in the Secondary Language for Bilingual Mode. You
can record up to two announcements in Bilingual Mode.
■
Shows the script used to record the Day Menu Prompt in the System
Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for Bilingual
Mode.
■
Form 4A: Day Menu Prompt—Secondary Language. Used only if the
system is set for Bilingual Mode. Shows the script used to record the Day
Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language.
■
Language. Shows the script used to record the Night Menu Prompt in
the System Language for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language for
Bilingual Mode.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding Programming
■
Form 5A: Night Menu Prompt: Secondary Language. Used only if the
system is set for Bilingual Mode. Shows the script used to record the
Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language.
■
Form 6: Line Ownership. Identifies the lines assigned VMS Line
Coverage. Also shows for each owned line, the associated telephone
number, the name of the subscriber who owns the line, and the owner’s
mailbox number.
Samples of these forms and instructions for completing them are included in
Using System Programming
A special login number is required to program the voice messaging system.
The following information applies to this login:
■
The login number is 99.
■
99 is not an extension number.
■
This login does not have an associated mailbox.
■
The language associated with this login is either the System Language
chosen for Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language chosen for
Bilingual Mode; it cannot be changed.
■
This login’s factory-set Password is 1234. If you are the System Manager,
before you begin to program the system.
NOTE:
Although this login has a Password, it does not have an associated
mailbox.
To begin programming the voice messaging system, you make a call to the
Voice Mail Service, enter the login and password, and select option 9 (you are
not prompted for this option). This takes you to the Programming Main Menu
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding Programming
The Programming Main Menu
The Programming Main Menu allows you to access the Language Mode and the
language(s) associated with that mode, the Automated Attendant Service Menu,
mailbox assignments, and line ownership assignments.
Intercom
7 7 7 )
Call Voice Mail Service (Press
Enter Login (Press
9 9 #
)
1 2 3 4 #
)
(Press
Enter Mailbox Password
Select
Programming
Main Menu
9 )
(Press
Line
Ownership
(Press [ 6 ])
Mailboxes
(Press [ 4 ])
Automated
Attendant
(Press [ 3 ])
Language
(Press [ 1 ])
Figure 3-1. Programming Menus
Accessing the Programming Main Menu
To access the Programming Main Menu:
1. Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or a programmed VMMsgs button.
The system plays:
Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Please enter extension
and #. Otherwise, to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4.
2.
Press [
9
] [
9
] [ # ].
The system plays:
Enter password and #.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding Programming
3.
Enter the Password and press #. (The factory-set Password is 1234.)
The system plays:
System Manager.
PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4.
The system plays the available programming options. It does not play
option 9 (the Programming Main Menu), which only the System Manager
can access.
Press [
9
] to access the Programming Main Menu.
4.
The system plays:
To program the System Language press 1, for Automated
Attendant press 3, for mailboxes press 4, for line
ownership press 6. If finished press * #.
Programming Guidelines
Once you are familiar with the voice messaging system, use these shortcuts to
save time while programming:
■
You do not have to wait for a prompt to play before entering digits for the
next step.
■
Press [
Press [
Press [
★
★
★
] [
] [
] [
#
4
] to return to the previous menu.
■
■
] to repeat the current menu options.
] at any point during programming to restart at the
7
Programming Main Menu.
■
■
Use the handset rather than the speakerphone to record prompts and
greetings to avoid background noise in your recordings.
To ensure that you hear voice prompts, turn off your microphone when
programming the system using the speakerphone.
■
Hang Up to exit programming.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
4
Contents
Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and
Announcements
Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and
Announcements
4-i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
4-ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
4
Overview
This chapter identifies the four possible voice messaging system configurations.
It tells you how to perform initial programming of the voice messaging and
communications systems. The first two procedures allow you to access and
program the voice messaging system—you must perform these procedures first
for every installation. The next set of procedures covers voice messaging
system programming. The last section covers how to program the
communications system.
The order of the procedures in this chapter enables you to program the Menu
Definition and to record the Day and/or Night Prompts and Automated
Attendant Announcements before the voice messaging system begins to
handle calls—this order is recommended for voice messaging systems that are
being added to existing communications systems. If this is a new installation,
however, you can program the communications system first, then the voice
messaging system if you prefer.
In addition, you can either follow the step-by-step instructions or use the
flowchart at the end of this manual as a quick guide. If you use the step-by-step
instructions, note that Step 1 of each procedure for the voice messaging system
is logging in. However, if you are already logged in, you can skip Step 1.
Finally, some features and procedures in this chapter may not be available on
your communications system. If you are not sure, check the Programming and
Use guide for that system.
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Voice Mail System Configurations
The PARTNER Mail VS supports the following configurations:
■
2 voice channels (ports), 10 mailboxes (standard)
■
2 ports, 20 mailboxes (requires a Mailbox Expansion Card)
■
4 ports, 20 mailboxes (requires a Mailbox Expansion Card)
■
4 ports, 40 mailboxes (requires a Mailbox Expansion Card)
configurations.
Upgrading Your Voice Mail System
If you are upgrading your voice mail system with the addition of a Mailbox
Expansion Card, when you return power to the system the appropriate number
of mailboxes is activated. For example, if you are upgrading to a 4-port,
20-mailbox configuration, the first 20 mailboxes are activated. And previously
existing programming (including existing mailbox assignment information,
personal greetings, and passwords) is saved. You do not need to reprogram
the system; however, you should:
■
Delete any unused mailboxes and create new ones following the
NOTE:
the voice messaging system. You can also play existing mailbox
numbers and receive information on the number of existing
mailboxes, as well as the maximum mailbox capacity for the
current system configuration. At the Programming Main Menu,
press [ 4 ] to receive the message indicating how many mailboxes
currently exist and how many are allowed. For more information,
■
For 4-port configurations: Add two extensions to the VMS Hunt Group
(Extension Hunt Group 7). These additional extensions correspond to the
middle two extensions. For example, if you are upgrading from two to
four ports, extensions 18 and 19 would be added to extensions 20 and
21. You must perform this task to ensure that the system functions
instructions on how to assign the additional VMS Hunt Group Extensions.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Initial Communications System Setup
You must perform the first two procedures for every installation. The procedure
for Outgoing Call Restriction is strongly recommended to ensure system
security. For the following procedures, you need to know the extension numbers
(in Chapter 2) show the possible extension numbers. For the extension numbers
communications system.
VMS Hunt Group Extensions
You must use this procedure to assign the extensions associated with the voice
messaging system module to Hunt Group 7. This Hunt Group, which is called
the VMS Hunt Group, is used exclusively for the voice messaging system.
Group 7:
1.
At extension 10*, press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
2. Enter the System Password, if required.
3. Press [
#
] [
5
] [
0
] [ 5 ].
4. At the Group: prompt, press [
7
].
5. At the Extension: prompt, enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
6.
7. Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension
8. Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each one.
9.
10.
*
Some systems also allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use
guide for the communications system.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Transfer Return Extensions
For extensions associated with the voice mail system unit, use the following
procedure. If the voice mail system transfers a call to an extension that has no
Voice Mail coverage, or if Voice Mail coverage is Off, and that extension does
not answer, the communications system transfers the call to the Transfer Return
Extension.
For extensions that do not have Voice Mail coverage, this procedure ensures
that unanswered calls transferred by the voice mail system return to the
designated extension, where they will ring until they are answered.
To assign extension 10 as the transfer return extension for the PARTNER
1. Press [
#
] [
3
] [
0
] [ 6 ]*.
At the Extension: prompt, enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension
2.
At the Data: prompt, press [
1
] [ ].
0
3.
4.
Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension
5. At the Data: prompt, press [
1
] [
0
].
repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one.
6.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ ] to exit programming.
0
7.
8.
voice messaging system.
Outgoing Call Restriction
Use this procedure to restrict all extensions associated with the voice mail
system unit from making outside calls. Outgoing call restriction is strongly
recommended, in particular, to protect system security when Outcalling
Press [
#
] [
4
] [
0
] [ ].
1
1.
2.
At the Extension: prompt, enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 2 Inside Only.
3.
4.
Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.
5.
6.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each PARTNER MAIL VS extension.
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
7.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 0 ] to exit programming.
messaging system.
NOTE:
If Outcalling is permitted, be sure to create Allowed and Disallowed
instructions.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Voice Messaging System
Programming
Language
if any of the Language settings are changed from the factory defaults:
■
If none of the Language settings is changed, skip to “Automated
Attendant Service” and follow the instructions for Monolingual Mode.
■
If any of the Language settings are changed, follow the appropriate
procedure for either Monolingual Mode or Bilingual Mode.
Monolingual Mode
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
2. Press [
Press [
1
2
] for Language.
] for System Language.
3.
4. Press [ 6 ] to modify System Language.
5.
Enter the number corresponding to the System Language specified on
Press [ 9 ] to confirm your selection.
6.
7. Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
7
8.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Bilingual Mode
To change the Language Mode and the Primary and Secondary Languages as
1.
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a.
b.
c.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
].
d. Press [
9
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press [
Press [
Press [
Press [
Press [
1
] for Language.
1
] for Language Mode.
] for Bilingual Mode.
] for System Language.
] for Primary Language or [
] to modify the language.
2
2
1
6
2
] for Secondary Language.
7. Press [
9.
Press [
9
] to confirm your selection.
10.
To modify the other language, press [
Otherwise, skip this step.
★
] [
#
] and repeat Steps 6 through 9.
11. Press [
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
12.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Automated Attendant Service
Service.” Otherwise, to program Automated Attendant Service:
■
If the system is set for Monolingual Mode, use the procedures below.
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, use the procedures later in this
chapter.
Monolingual Mode
Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and Announcements
It is important to understand that you must approve each element (that is, the
Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as well as
save all of these entries (in Step 15). If you exit at any point before saving
your approved entries, your entries will be lost. This procedure is designed
to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the
process of building/modifying it.
1.
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
b.
c.
d.
Press [
9
] [
9
] [ ].
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press [
Press [
3
] for Automated Attendant.
] for Day Menu.
1
Press [ 6 ] to modify the Menu Definition and/or Day Menu Prompt.
Enter a Selector Code for which information is specified in Column C of
6.
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you are modifying this Selector Code action.
7. Do one of the following:
—
—
—
Press [
Press [
Press [
1
3
5
] for Selector Code Transfer.
] for Announcement.
] for Direct Extension Transfer (factory-default setting).
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
8. Do one of the following:
—
If you chose Selector Code Transfer in Step 7, enter the extension,
Hunt Group, or Calling Group number specified in Column C of
Step 5. Then, press [ # ]. Go to Step 10.
— If you chose Announcement in Step 7, enter the Announcement
corresponds to the Selector Code entered in Step 5. Go to Step 9.
9. To record an Announcement, lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the
10.
Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each Selector Code for which there is
information in Column C.
11. Press [
★
] [
#
] to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu
Definition.
12.
If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement,
press [ # ] to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 16.
13. To record a Day Menu Prompt, lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the
14.
Choose an option or skip this step:
—
Press [
2
] [
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt or
Announcement. Begin recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ]
after recording. Repeat, if desired.
—
—
Press [
Press [
2
] [
] [
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt or Announcement.
★
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt or Announcement and return
to Step 12 to be prompted for re-recording.
15.
Press [ ] [ ] to approve and save the Menu Definition, the Day Menu
★
#
Prompt, and any Announcements.
16. Press [ ] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
★
7
17.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Night Menu Prompt
1.
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. if you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a.
Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
9
9
#
c.
d
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
2.
Press [
3
2
6
] for Automated Attendant.
] for Night Menu.
3. Press [
4. Press [
] to modify the Night Menu Prompt.
5.
6.
Press [ ] after recording.
1
7. Choose an option or skip this step:
—
Press [
2
] [
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.
Repeat, if desired.
—
—
Press [
2
] [
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt.
Press [
★
] [
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 5 to be
prompted for re-recording.
8. Press [
9.
★
★
] [
] [
#
7
] to approve the Night Menu Prompt.
Press [
] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Bilingual Mode
Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements
record the Day Menu Prompts for the Primary and Secondary Languages
It is important to understand that you must approve each element (that is, the
Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as well as
save all of these entries (in Step 22). If you exit at any point before saving
your approved entries, your entries will be lost. This procedure is designed
to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete menu while you are in the
process of building/modifying it. Be sure to allow yourself enough time to
complete this procedure in its entirety.
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
c. Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
d. Press [ ].
Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.
9
2.
3.
Press [
1
] for Day Menu.
4. Press [ 6 ] to modify the Menu Definition and/or Day Menu Prompts.
5. Enter a Selector Code for which information is specified in Column C of
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you are modifying this Selector Code action.
6.
7. Do one of the following:
—
—
Press [
Press [
1
3
] for Selector Code Transfer.
] for Announcement.
— Press [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer (factory-default setting).
8. Do one of the following:
— If you chose Selector Code Transfer in Step 7, enter the extension,
Hunt Group, or Calling Group number specified in Column C of
Step 5. Then, press [ # ]. Go to Step 10.
If you chose Announcement in Step 7, enter the Announcement
corresponds to the Selector Code entered in Step 5. Go to Step 9.
—
9. To record an Announcement, lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
10.
Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each Selector Code for which there is
information in Column C.
11. Press [
★
] [ ] to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu
#
Definition.
12. At this point, do one of the following:
—
If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement,
press [ # ] to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 22.
— If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt in the Primary Language,
continue with Step 13.
—
If you want to record the Announcement in the Secondary Language,
return to Step 17.
— If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the
Secondary Language, skip to Step 17.
13.
Lift the handset, press [ 1 ] and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4.
Press [
14. Press [
15.
1
] after recording.
1
] after recording.
Choose an option or skip this step:
—
Press [
2
] [
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.
Repeat, if desired.
—
—
Press [
Press [
2
] [
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt.
★
] [
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 13 to be
prompted for re-recording.
16.
Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Day Menu Prompt.
★
#
17. If you want to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the
Secondary Language, continue with Step 18; otherwise, skip to Step 21.
Press [ 2 ] and record the Menu Prompt from Form 4A (or Announcement
18.
19. Press [
1
] after recording.
20.
Choose an option or skip this step:
—
Press [
2
] [
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt or
Announcement. Begin recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ]
after recording. Repeat, if desired.
—
—
Press [
Press [
2
] [
] [
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt or Announcement.
★
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt or Announcement and return
to Step 18 to be prompted for re-recording.
21. Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.
★
#
22.
Press [ # ] to approve and save all entries. The Menu Definition, Day Menu
Prompts, and Announcements (if any) now take effect.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
23.
24.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
7
Night Menu Prompt
To record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary and Secondary Languages
1.
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
2. Press [
3
] for Automated Attendant.
] for Night Menu.
3.
4.
Press [
Press [
2
6
] to modify the Night Menu Prompt.
5. At this point, do one of the following:
—
If you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language,
continue with Step 6.
—
To record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language, skip to
Step 11.
6.
7.
8.
Press [ ] after recording.
Choose an option or skip this step:
1
—
Press [
2
] [ ] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin
1
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.
Repeat, if desired.
—
—
Press [
Press [
2
] [
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt.
★
] [
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 6 to be
prompted for re-recording.
9. Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Night Menu Prompt.
★
#
10. If you want to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language,
continue with Step 11; otherwise, skip to Step 15.
11.
Press [ 2 ] and record the Menu Prompt from Form 5A.
12. Press [ ] after recording.
1
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
13.
Choose an option or skip this step:
Press [
2
] [
1
] to immediately re-record this Menu Prompt. Begin
—
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.
Repeat, if desired.
—
—
Press [
Press [
2
] [
] [
3
] to play back this Menu Prompt.
★
3
] to delete this Menu Prompt and return to Step 11 to be
prompted for re-recording.
14. Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Night Menu Prompt.
★
#
15. Press [ # ] to approve all changes. The Night Menu Prompts now take
effect.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
7
16.
17.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Voice Mail Service
if mailboxes are numbered differently from the factory defaults, if any mailbox is
to be deleted, or if a Mailbox Language is changed for any mailbox.
■
If mailboxes are not numbered differently, no mailbox is deleted, no
mailbox’s language is changed, and no Outcalling is assigned, skip to
“Line Ownership.”
■
If any mailbox is to be deleted, use the procedure below.
■
If mailboxes are numbered differently, first use the procedure below to
delete all mailboxes from extensions that do not require coverage; then
extensions that require coverage.
■
■
section.
Deleting a Mailbox
NOTE:
The receptionist’s mailbox (at extension 10) cannot be deleted.
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
7
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [
Press [ ].
] for Mailboxes.
#
].
9
Press [
4
2.
followed by [ ].
#
Press [ ] [ ] to delete the mailbox.
★
3
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Press [ 9 ] to confirm mailbox deletion.
Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each mailbox to be deleted.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
7
this chapter.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Creating a Mailbox
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
c.
d.
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
] for Mailboxes.
9
2. Press [
4
3.
followed by [ # ].
4.
Press [
4
] to create this mailbox.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for each mailbox to be created.
6.
7.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
7
Modifying a Mailbox’s Language
1.
If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
a.
b.
Press [
9
] [
9
] [ # ].
c. Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
d. Press [
9
].
2. Press [ ] for Mailboxes.
4
3.
4.
Enter the number of a mailbox whose language is to change as indicated
Press [
6
] for Mailbox Language.
5. Press [ 6 ] to modify Mailbox Language.
6.
Enter the number corresponding to the Mailbox Language specified on
7. Press [
9
] to confirm.
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for each mailbox whose language is to be
changed.
9. Press [
10.
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
in this chapter.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Assigning Outcalling Privileges
When the system is first installed, the Outcalling feature is not assigned to any
mailbox.
CAUTION:
Before you assign mailboxes Outcalling privileges, you should consider
the several system performance and security issues: If the privilege is
assigned to a majority of users and their message traffic is heavy, system
performance could be adversely affected. Outcalling attempts could be
delayed. in rare instances, an Outcall may not be performed if it is
delayed beyond the scheduled Outcalling period.
Additionally, there are no restrictions on the Outcalling numbers entered
by subscribers. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that you limit the
number of subscribers who have the Outcalling privilege. And call
restrictions should be used for the communications system. See
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a.
Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
c .
d . Press [
Press [ ] for Mailboxes.
9
].
4
2.
3.
Enter the number of a mailbox whose Outcalling permission is to change
4.
Press [
5
9
] for Outcalling Administration.
5. Press [
] to turn on the Outcalling feature.
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each mailbox whose Outcalling permission
is to be changed.
7. Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu.
7
8.
NOTE:
Although you have assigned Outcalling for a specific mailbox, the
subscriber must specify a telephone or pager number, and turn
outcalling on before this feature will function. Subscribers may also
establish an Outcalling schedule (optional).
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Line Ownership
■
■
Assigning Line Ownership
1. If necessary, access the Programming Main Menu. If you are already at
the Programming Main Menu, skip to Step 2.
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Mailbox Password and press [ # ].
c.
d.
Press [
9
].
Press [
Press [
6
4
] for Line Ownership.
2.
3.
4.
] to assign Line Ownership.
followed by [ # ].
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each owned line.
7. Hang up to exit voice messaging system programming.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Communications System
Programming
Automated Attendant Service
communications system.
VMS–AA. If so, use this section to program Automated Attendant Service;
Group Call Distribution
Use this procedure to specify the outside lines on which Automated Attendant
Service is required.
Group 7:
1. At extension 10*, press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
2. Enter the System Password if required.
†
.
Press [
#
] [
2
] [
0
] [
6
]
3.
4. At the Group: prompt, press [
7
].
At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-AA line specified in the Line
5.
6.
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
7. To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate
line number displays.
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 ASSigned.
8.
10.
*
Some systems also allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use
guide for the communications system.
In some cuntries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
†
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
VMS Hunt Delay
To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting from Immediate to Delayed as specified
1.
2.
Press [
#
] [
5
] [
0
] [ ].
6
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.
3. Continue with “VMS Hunt Schedule” on the next page.
Automatic Extension Privacy
If VMS Hunt Delay is set to Immediate, use this procedure to prevent users from
accidentally picking up calls sent to the voice messaging system.
To set Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) to Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL
1. Press [
#
] [
3
] [
0
] [ 4 ].
2. Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
3.
4. Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
5.
repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each one.
7.
Continue with “VMS Hunt Schedule” below.
VMS Hunt Schedule
To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting from Always to Day Only or Night
1.
2.
3.
Press [
#
] [
5
] [
0
] [ ].
7
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Night Service
procedure below.
To program Night Service on a button with lights at extension 10 as specified on
1. Press [
#
] [
5
] [
0
] [ 3 ].
2. At this point, do one of the following:
— If you want to assign Night Service to the first available button on the
system phone, press [ Next Data ] until the display reads:
Night Service
1 Assigned-Ext10
Go to Step 3.
— If you want to assign Night Service to a specific button*, press [ 3 ].
The display reads:
Night Service
3 Select Button
Press the desired programmable button with lights to assign Night
Service to that button.
3.
Label the Night Service button at extension 10.
4. Continue with “Music On Hold” below.
Music On Hold
If desired, program Music On Hold. See the Programming and Use guide for
the communications system for instructions.
*
Select button (option 3) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide
for the communications system.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Disallowed Phone Numbers
If Outcalling is permitted, a Disallowed Phone Number List (#404) can be
created to restrict calls.
Creating a Disallowed Phone Number List
Number List is needed for Outcalling. If so, continue with the procedures in this
To create a list of Disallowed Phone Numbers:
1. Press [
#
] [
4
] [
0
] [ 4 ].
At the List Number: prompt, enter the list number (1-4).
2.
At the Entry: prompt, select a list entry (01-10).
3.
prompt, enter the first number.
4. At the Data---------------
5.
To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ].
6. At this point:
— To change the number you just entered, press [ Remove ] and repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
— To delete the number you just entered, press [ Remove ].
— To enter other numbers in this list, press [ Next Item ] and repeat Steps 4
and 5.
Assigning the Disallowed Phone Number List
The Disallowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcalling should be
assigned to the extension(s) that are connected to the Outcalling port.
To assign a Disallowed Phone Number List to the extensions:
1. Press [
#
] [
4
] [
0
] [ 5 ].
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.
Enter the list number (1-4).
To assign the list, press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ].
To program another extension, press [ Next Procedure ] [ Prev Procedure ] and
repeat from Step 2.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Allowed Phone Numbers
If Outcalling is permitted, an Allowed Phone Number List (#407) can be created
to identify numbers to which Outcalling is allowed.
Creating an Allowed Phone Number List
Number List is needed for Outcalling. If so, continue with the procedures in this
NOTE:
If the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions were restricted to Inside Only using
Outgoing Call Restriction (#401), Outcalling will not work unless an
Allowed Phone Number List is created and assigned. Outcalls can be
made only to the numbers included in the list.
To create a list of Allowed Phone Numbers:
Press [
#
] [
4
] [
0
] [ ].
7
1.
2.
At the List Number: prompt, enter the list number (1-4).
3. At the Entry: prompt, select a list entry (01-10).
prompt, enter the first number.
4.
5.
6.
At the Data---------------
To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ].
At this point:
— To change the number you just entered, press [ Remove ] and repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
—
—
To delete the number you just entered, press [ Remove ].
To enter other numbers in this list, press [ Next Item ] and repeat Steps 4
and 5.
Assigning the Allowed Phone Number List
The Allowed Phone Number List that was created for Outcalling should be
assigned to the extension(s) that are connected to the Outcalling port.
To assign the Allowed Phone Number List to the extensions:
1. Press [
#
] [
4
] [
0
] [ 8 ].
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter the list number (1-4).
To assign the list, press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
To save the number in memory, you must press [ Enter ].
To program another extension, press [ Next Procedure ] [ Prev Procedure ] and
repeat from Step 2.
7.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Call Answer Service
communications system.
■
extension numbers appear in the VMS-Mail column, use “Line Coverage”
on the next page to program personal lines for Call Answer Service.
■
■
to see if Automatic VMS Cover is assigned to any extensions. If it is, refer
If neither VMS-Mail for personal lines or Automatic VMS Cover is
specified, skip to “Telephone Button Programming.”
Line Coverage
■
If check marks appear for any lines in this column, use the procedure in
“VMS Line Coverage” below.
■
If extension numbers are specified for any lines in this column, use the
procedure in “Line Coverage Extension” below.
VMS Line Coverage
Group 7:
1. Press [
#
] [
2
] [
0
] [ 6 ]*.
At the Group: prompt, press [
7
].
2.
3.
At the Line: prompt, enter the first line checked in the VMS-Mail
column.
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover.
4.
5. To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate
line number displays.
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover.
6.
7.
8. If extension numbers are specified for any lines in this column, use the
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Line Coverage Extension
To assign line coverage for the extension numbers specified in the VMS-Mail
1.
2.
Press [
#
] [
2
] [
0
] [ ]*.
8
At the Line: prompt, enter the first line for which an extension is
3. At the Data: prompt, enter the number of the extension specified in the
VMS-Mail column.
4.
To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate
line number displays.
5. At the Data: prompt, enter the number of the extension specified in the
VMS-Mail column.
6.
7.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each VMS-Mail line for which an extension
Continue with the next section, “Automatic VMS Cover.”
Automatic VMS Cover
it is, follow the procedure below. If not, skip to “VMS Cover Rings.”
To change the Automatic VMS Cover setting for an extension to Assigned as
1. Press [
#
] [
3
] [
1
] [
0
].
2. Enter the number of the first extension to which Automatic VMS Cover is
to be assigned.
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
3.
4.
To program another extension, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the
extension number shows on the display.
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
5.
6.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for each extension to which Automatic VMS Cover
is to be assigned.
7.
*
Extension Line Coverage (#208) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use
guide for the communications system.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
VMS Cover Rings
factory setting of 3. If it is, follow the procedure below beginning with
Step 1. If not, skip to Step 3 of the procedure below.
To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice
Press [
#
] [
1
] [
1
] [ 7 ].
1.
] [ ] to exit programming mode.
Continue with the next section, “Telephone Button Programming.”
3. Press [ Feature ] [
0
0
4.
Telephone Button Programming
system. Be sure you have a version of the form for each subscriber’s phone.
Use this section to program buttons on subscribers’ phones, including the
receptionist’s phone. This section uses Centralized Telephone Programming.
When you are finished programming, be sure to label all buttons on
subscribers’ phones.
VMS Cover
This button allows the subscriber to turn voice mail coverage on and off.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].
1.
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.
Press a programmable button with lights.
3.
4.
5.
Press [ Feature ] [
1
] [
]†.
5
At this point, do one of the following:
—
—
—
Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this
extension.
Press [ Central Tel Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming
procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 0 ] to exit.
*
VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide
for the communications system.
†
In some countries, the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is [ 1 ] [ 6 ]. Check the Programming
and Use guide for the communications system.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Do Not Disturb
Used in conjunction with either automatic VMS cover or manual VMS cover, this
button lets subscribers send callers immediately to his or her mailbox (instead
of ringing the extension first).
1. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.
3.
4.
5.
Press a programmable button with lights.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 1 ].
At this point, do one of the following:
—
Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this
extension.
—
Press [ Central Tel Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming
procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension.
—
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] to exit.
Voice Mailbox Transfer
This button lets any system user transfer calls directly to a subscriber’s mailbox,
without ringing the extension first.
1.
2.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.
3. Press a programmable button.
4.
5.
Press [ Feature ] [
1
] [ ]*.
4
At this point, do one of the following:
—
—
—
Go to Step 3 of the next procedure to program another button for this
extension.
Press [ Central Tel Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming
procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 0 ] to exit.
*
In some countries, the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is [ 1 ] [ 5 ]. Check the Programming
and Use guide for the communications system.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Voice Mail Messages
This intercom Auto Dial button allows the subscriber to access the voice
messaging system with the touch of one button.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].
1.
2. Dial the number of the extension to be programmed.
3.
4.
5.
Press a programmable button.
Press left [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
].
At this point, do one of the following:
—
Press [ Central Tel Program ] and go to Step 2 of any button programming
procedure in this section to program a button for a different extension.
—
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 0 ] to exit.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Verifying System Operation
After you finish programming the voice messaging system and the
communications system, you should perform the tests described in this section
to verify system operation.
If your system allows programming from extension 11*, you should perform
these tests from extension 11 to keep extension 10 free for the receptionist to
handle calls.
Voice Mail Service
Make a call to the VMS Hunt Group by pressing [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the
programmed VMMsgs button. You should hear the Voice Mail Service greeting:
Welcome to PARTNER MAIL VS. Please enter extension
and #. Otherwise, to access PARTNER Tutor, press * 4.
Automated Attendant Service
■
If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Day Only or Always, follow the
procedure for Day Menu.
■
If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Night Only, follow the procedure for
Night Menu.
Day Menu
1. Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is off.
2. Call in on a line answered by the Automated Attendant Service.
3. If the system is set for:
Immediate, Automated Attendant Service should answer the call on
—
the second ring.
— Delayed, Automated Attendant Service should answer the call after
the fourth ring.
4.
5.
6.
Listen for the Day Menu Prompt.
After the prompt, choose an option from the day menu.
Make sure your call is transferred to the appropriate extension or group,
or the correct Announcement is played.
7. Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the day menu.
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, press [ ] [ ] to check the Day
★
1
8.
Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language. You should also hear any
recorded Announcement.
*
Some systems allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide
for the communications system.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
9.
Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for each line that has Automated Attendant
Service coverage.
10.
If the VMS Hunt Schedule is set for Always, continue with “Night Menu”
below.
Night Menu
1.
2.
3.
Make sure the Night Service button at extension 10 is on.
Call in on a line answered by the Automated Attendant Service.
If the system is set for:
—
Immediate, Automated Attendant Service should answer the call on
the second ring.
—
Delayed, Automated Attendant Service should answer the call after
the fourth ring.
Listen for the Night Menu Prompt.
4.
5.
If you already tested the Day Menu, go to Step 8. Otherwise, after the
prompt, choose an option from the night menu.
6.
Make sure your call is transferred to the appropriate extension or group,
or the correct announcement is played.
7.
8.
Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each option on the night menu.
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, press [
★
] [ ] to check the Night
1
Menu Prompt in the Secondary Language. You should also hear any
recorded Announcement.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Programming
Call Answer Service
VMS Extension Coverage
1.
2.
3.
Press the Do Not Disturb button at the appropriate destination extensions
to quickly route your test calls to Call Answer Service.
For extensions that do not have Automatic VMS Cover, turn on coverage
by pressing the VMS Cover button at those extensions.
Call the first extension that has VMS coverage (either automatic or
manual). If Do Not Disturb is on at the extension, Call Answer Service
should answer the call after one ring and you should hear the default
greeting for that mailbox. (If Do Not Disturb is not on, the call rings at the
extension before Call Answer Service answers it.)
4. Repeat this procedure for every extension that has voice mail coverage.
VMS Line Coverage
Call in on the first line that is programmed for VMS Line Cover.
Call Answer Service should answer the call on the fifth ring and the
factory-set greeting should prompt you to leave a message in that line
owner’s mailbox.
1.
2.
Repeat this procedure for every line that has VMS Line Cover.
Line Coverage Extension
1. Make sure VMS Cover is on at the owner’s extension.
2.
Call in and make sure the call goes to VMS Cover by the number of rings
specified by VMS Cover Rings (#117)*.
3.
Verify that you hear the factory-set mailbox greeting for the line owner.
4. Repeat this procedure for every Line Coverage extension.
*
VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide
for the communications system.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
5
Contents
Announcements
5-i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
Playing the Day and Night Menu Prompts in the Primary
and Secondary Languages
5-28
Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and
Announcements
5-30
5-ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
5
This chapter provides the programming procedures you can use to make
changes to the voice messaging system to reflect changes in your company.
Most changes you make will occur because of personnel changes. The
following list identifies areas of system programming that you are likely to
change as you manage the system on an on-going basis:
■
Language. Allows you to change the Language Mode (Monolingual or
Bilingual) and the language(s) supported by that mode.
■
Automated Attendant Service. Allows you to change the prompt that
outside callers hear when the Automated Attendant answers calls and to
redefine menu options for transferring outside callers to specific
destinations and for changing announcements that callers can choose to
hear. Also allows you to specify new lines for Automated Attendant
Service coverage, if you add new lines to your system.
■
Mailbox Assignments. Allows you to delete and create mailboxes, reset
mailboxes and subscriber’s passwords to factory settings, assign/ cancel
Outcalling privileges for a subscriber’s mailbox, and change the
language a subscriber hears when using Voice Mail Service.
■
Line Coverage. Allows you to modify line coverage using either VMS
Line Coverage or Extension Line Coverage.
■
Telephone Button Programming. Allows you to program buttons on
subscriber’s system phones for convenient use of voice messaging
system features.
If you are a new System Manager, you should review the following section for
rest of this chapter on an as-needed basis. Also, if you have not done so
messaging system and communications system programming.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
General Information
This section tells you how to change the System Manager’s password, which is
required for changing voice messaging system settings. It also provides
information that you should share with all system users and other information
that is specifically for the receptionist at extension 10.
Changing Your Password
The factory setting for Iogin 99’s (the System Manager’s) Password is 1234.
To prevent unauthorized programming of the system, you should change the
default password immediately after installation or any time the password has
been reset. You can assign up to four digits for a Password. It is recommended
that you create a Password from random, non-sequential digits.
If you change the Password and forget it, you must contact the BCS Technical
Service Center at 1 800 628-2888 or call your Lucent Technologies’
Representative or local Authorized Dealer for instructions on how to reset the
Password.
To change the Password for login 99:
1.
2.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
3. Enter the existing password (for example, 1234) and press [ # ].
4. Press [ ] to change the password.
5
The prompt asks you to enter your new password.
Enter up to four digits for the new password and press [ # ].
The prompt asks you to re-enter your new password.
5.
6. Enter your new password again followed by [ # ].
The new password is now active.
7. Hang up to quit.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Training Co-Workers
Language
You should let system users know about the following language options:
■
You can change the language of voice prompts that a subscriber hears
when recording a personal greeting, retrieving messages, and other
Voice Mail services. This language can be different from the System
Language set for Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary
Languages set for Bilingual Mode.
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, subscribers can record two
personal greetings: one in the Primary Language and a second in the
Secondary Language. They should include a sentence early in the
greetings that lets callers know that they can switch to the other language
by pressing [
★
] [ ] while the greeting is playing.
1
Outcalling
You should let system users know that they can turn this feature on or off,
retrieve their messages from a touch-tone phone, as well as enter and change
their Outcalling number and schedule. Instructions for performing these tasks
are provided in Using the PARTNER MAIL VS® Voice Messaging System.
In addition, you should provide users with the following information about the
Outcalling feature:
■
Although you are responsible for assigning Outcalling privileges to a
subscriber’s mailbox, the subscriber must turn on Outcalling and specify
an Outcalling number. Otherwise, the system does not notify subscribers
when new messages have arrived in their mailboxes.
■
If the subscriber is logged into the system, the system does not place an
outcall.
■
If the subscriber disconnects from the system without listening to a new
message, the outcall is placed according to schedule.
■
The Outcalling number may contain up to 60 digits, including the * and #
symbols. (The * represents a 1.5-second pause.)
■
The “9” dialed to get an outside line must be included in the Outcalling
number. And a pause (*) should be included after the “9.”
■
Subscribers may also specify a schedule (that is, a start time and end
time) for Outcalling. For example, they may direct the system to outcall
only during the hours of 7:30 p.m. to 8:00 a.m. Otherwise, the default
schedule is 24 hours.
■
The start and end times entered by a user are based on a 24-hour clock;
however, the voice playback of these times is based on the system
language selection of 12 or 24-hour format. In the example above,
the subscriber would enter the start time of 7:30 p.m. as 1930# and
8:00 a.m. as 0800#.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
■
If a message arrives at a subscriber’s mailbox after the specified
Outcalling time interval, Outcalling notification for that message is not
initiated at the next Outcalling time interval.
■
■
The system attempts to outcall three times within a minimum time interval
of 15 minutes between attempts. However, during heavy message traffic
periods the time interval may be longer.
For a pager/beeper number:
—
Subscribers can program a callback number as part of the Outcalling
number.
— Subscribers are advised to enter several pauses (where each pause
is represented by a * sign) after the Outcalling number (before
entering their PIN and/or callback number) to allow the paging system
sufficient time to answer. Subscribers should experiment to determine
the correct number of pauses needed after the pager service number.
It is important to ensure that enough time is allowed for the call to be
dialed and answered before additional information (such as the PIN or
callback number) is dialed.
—
It is strongly recommended that subscribers verify that the system can
function properly with the Outcalling number as it is entered.
Subscribers should leave a message in their own mailbox during a
scheduled Outcalling period to ensure that the system places the call
to their beeper.
■
For a telephone number:
—
After the system has sent all the digits of the Outcalling number, the
system plays a message that announces the subscriber’s mailbox
number and notification that a new message has arrived. It also
instructs the subscriber how to access the new message and how to
cancel the Outcalling notification. This message is repeated five times
unless it is interrupted by the subscriber.
—
—
The subscriber may make up to three attempts to log in during the
outcall before the system disconnects.
A subscriber can cancel Outcalling for a new message without
logging in or listening to the new message by pressing [
listening to the Outcalling notification message.
★
] [ ] when
#
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Using the Tutor Feature
Tutor is an “on-line help” feature that allows all system users (not just voice
messaging system subscribers) to easily access and listen to information on
commonly-used communications system features. You should let system users
know about this feature and recommend that users stick the Tutor Service label
(provided with the voice messaging system hardware) into the depression for
the handset mouthpiece on the base of their system phone.
To access the Tutor menu, users simply call the voice messaging system by
dialing [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] and enter [
★
] [ 4 ] after they hear the Please enter
extension prompt. Voice prompts request the user to enter topic and
subtopic numbers. The available topics are:
1 Autodial Features
3 Fixed Features
1
2
Transfer
1 Last Number Redial
2 Save Number Redial
3 Personal Speed Dial
4 Intercom Auto Dial
5 Outside Auto Dial
Conference
4 About Your Phone
1 Buttons and Lights
2 Display
2 Internal Calls
3 Speakerphone
4
5
Volume
1 Hands Free Answer on Intercom
2 Voice Interrupt On Busy
3 Group Paging
Ring Patterns
Information about each subtopic is presented in short, easy to understand
segments. After a segment plays, the user hears one beep or two beeps:
■
One beep means that there is more information about the subtopic. The
user can press [
next segment.
★
] [
4
] to replay the previous segment or [
#
] to play the
■
Two beeps indicate the end of the information about the subtopic. The
user can press [ ] [ ] to replay the previous segment or [ ] to return to
★
4
#
the Tutor Main Menu.
NOTE:
Tutor’s prompts play in either the System Language selected for
Monolingual Mode or the Primary Language selected for Bilingual Mode.
This cannot be changed.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Receptionist’s Responsibilities
After the voice messaging system is installed, the receptionist at extension 10
should be aware of certain interactions between the voice messaging system
and the receptionist’s extension. Use the following list as a guide when you
explain these interactions to the receptionist:
■
The receptionist’s extension is factory set as extension 10 and cannot be
changed. The mailbox for this extension can handle up to 60 minutes of
stored messages (or 120 messages).
■
When the Automated Attendant Service answers outside calls, the
receptionist will receive calls from any caller who presses [ 0 ] or stays on
the line after hearing the menu prompt. “VMS” shows on the display of
the receptionist’s phone to identify calls transferred by the voice
messaging system.
■
The personal greeting recorded at the receptionist’s mailbox should be
more general than personal, since this mailbox is the destination for
business calls when the receptionist is not available.
■
If the receptionist requests a personal mailbox, you can create a guest
instructions. Once the guest mailbox is created, the receptionist should
tell people who might call to dial the extension number of the guest
mailbox to leave personal messages when they call and hear the
Automated Attendant Service prompt.
Additionally, the receptionist can record a note on the personal greeting
at extension 10 to notify callers of the guest mailbox. For example, the
personal greeting for extension 10 can also say “If you would like to leave
a personal message for Ms. Smith, dial [
★
] [
8
] [
3
] [ 3 ].” In this example, 33
represents the 2-digit extension number of the guest mailbox. Remind
the receptionist to log in to the guest mailbox regularly to check for
messages, since the guest mailbox does not have an associated phone
with a message waiting light.
■
If Automatic VMS Cover is not assigned to extension 10, you should
program a VMS Cover button and a Do Not Disturb button on the system
phone at extension 10. Then instruct the receptionist to press both the
VMS Cover and Do Not Disturb buttons (to turn the features on)
whenever the receptionist leaves the desk or leaves for the day. This
ensures that any calls routed to extension 10 when the receptionist is
away are immediately covered by the voice messaging system. If the
receptionist has Automatic VMS Cover, program only the Do Not Disturb
button at the extension.
■
If selector code 9 on the Automated Attendant Service menu is left at the
factory setting (which is highly recommended), callers can be routed
directly to the receptionist’s mailbox to leave a message. If this is the
case, let the receptionist know that he or she should review the
messages each morning and distribute them to the appropriate people.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Group Calling Tips
It is important to note that voice mail coverage is not provided for group calls. If
your system is set up for group transfer, be sure that the receptionist is aware of
the following items:
■
If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Hunt Group or
Calling Group*, and all members in the group are busy (members are
either on the phone or have Do Not Disturb on), the call is transferred to
the receptionist’s extension. When callers transfer to a busy group, they
hear Music On Hold, tones, ringing, or silence (depending on how the
communications system is set up) until the receptionist answers.
■
If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Calling Group
and the call is not answered, the call is transferred to the receptionist’s
extension after the programmed number of transfer return rings. The call
will not be sent to the voice mailbox.
■
If the Automated Attendant Service transfers a call to a Hunt Group that
has only one available member and that member does not answer the
call, the call is transferred to the receptionist’s extension after the
programmed number of transfer return rings. The call will not be sent to
the voice mailbox.
*
Calling Groups are not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the
communications system.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Language
You can choose the Language Mode, either Monolingual or Bilingual, and the
Language(s) used by that mode (see Figure 5-1). Monolingual Mode supports a
single System Language that callers hear when they call in to the voice
messaging system. Bilingual Mode supports two languages, a Primary
Language and a Secondary Language. Callers who call in to a voice messaging
system set for Bilingual Mode, hear the Automated Attendant Service menu
prompt, announcements, and mailbox greetings in the Primary Language, but
have the option of switching to the Secondary Language by pressing [ ★ ] [ 1 ].
Programming
Main Menu
(Press 9 )
Language
(Press [ 1 ])
System
Language
Language
Mode
(Press [ 2 ])
(Press [ 1 ])
Monolingual
Bilingual
Mode
(Press [ 2 ])
Mode
Yes
No
Bilingual
Mode?
(Press [ 1 ])
Play System
Language
(Press [ 2 ])
Modify System
Language
(Press [ 6 ])
Modify Primary
Language
(Press[ 1 ][ 6 ])
Play Primary
Language
(Press[ 1 ][ 2 ])
Modify
Play Secondary
Secondary
Language
(Press[ 2 ][ 6 ])
Language
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ])
Figure 5-1. Language Menu
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
If you need to change current programming for Language, you can use the
instructions presented in this section. For example:
■
If you want to change the Language Mode from Monolingual to Bilingual
or Bilingual to Monolingual, use “Modifying the Language Mode.”
■
If you want to change the current System Language used in Monolingual
Mode, use “Modifying the System Language.”
■
If you want to change the current Primary and/or Secondary Language
used in Bilingual Mode, use “Modifying the Primary Language” and/or
“Modifying the Secondary Language.”
Modifying the Language Mode
Language Mode.
When you change the Language Mode, the system continues to use any
recorded messages associated with the selected language. For example, if you
change from Monolingual to Bilingual Mode and the System Language in
Monolingual Mode was Latin American Spanish callers will hear Latin American
Spanish as the Primary Language. Also, when you change the mode, listen to
the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure
they are still relevant, and re-record them if necessary.
To change the Language Mode:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
9
9
#
c.
d.
Enter the Password and press [
Press [ ].
#
].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
3.
Press [ ] for Language.
1
The system plays:
To program System
If finished, press * #.
Mode, press 1.
To program Language
Language, press 2.
Press [
The system plays the current Language Mode then:
For Bilingual Mode,
1
] for Language Mode.
For Monolingual Mode, press 1.
If finished, press * #.
press 2.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
4.
Either:
—
Press [
1
] for Monolingual Mode.
The system plays:
To program Language
To program System Language, press 2.
System is in Monolingual Mode.
Mode, press 1.
If finished, press * #.
—
Press [ ] for Bilingual Mode.
2
The system plays:
To program Language
To program System Language, press 2.
System is in Bilingual Mode.
Mode, press 1.
If finished, press * #.
5.
At this point, do one of the following:
—
—
—
To change the System Language if the system is set for Monolingual
Mode, go to Step 3 of “Modifying the System Language.”
To change the Primary Language if the system is set for Bilingual
Mode, go to Step 3 of “Modifying the Primary Language.”
Press [
quit.
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to
7
Monolingual Mode
Playing the System Language
To listen to the current System Language:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
] [ ] or the progrmmed VMMsgs button.
Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
7
9
9
#
c.
d.
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
3.
Press [
1
] for Language.
The system plays:
To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System
Language, press 2. If finished, press * #.
Press [
2
] for System Language.
The system plays:
To play System Language, press 2. To modify System
Language, press 6. If finished press * #.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
4. Press [ ].
2
The system plays:
System language is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the
To play System Language, press 2.
To modify System Language, press 6.
press * #.
current language).
If finished,
5.
At this point, do one of the following:
—
To change the System Language, go to Step 4 of “Modifying the
System Language.”
—
Press [
quit.
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to
7
Modifying the System Language
System Language selected for Monolingual Mode.
When you change the System Language, the system uses any recorded
messages already associated with the new System Language. After changing
the System Language, listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night
Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant, and re-record them if
necessary.
NOTE:
When you change the System Language, the Mailbox Language for any
mailboxes that were left at the factory setting also change to reflect the
new System Language. Any mailboxes that were assigned a different
language do not change.
To change the System Language:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [ 7 ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].
d.
Press [
9
].
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
3.
Press [
1
] for Language.
The system plays:
To program System
To modify System
To program Language Mode, press 1.
Language, press 2.
If finished, press * #.
Press [ ] for System Language.
2
The system plays:
To play System Language, press 2.
Language, press 6.
If finished press * #.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
4. Press [
6
].
The system plays the current System Language, then prompts you to
enter the number corresponding to the desired language.
Press the number for the language you want to use.
The system plays:
5.
6.
For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current language),
press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.
Either:
—
Press [
6
] to cancel your selection.
The system plays:
System Language has not been changed.
—
Press [
9
] to confirm your selection.
The system plays:
System Language has been changed.
Press [
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Bilingual Mode
Playing the Primary Language
To listen to the current Primary Language:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
7
7
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
c.
d.
Press [
9
].
The system plays the system programming options.
2. Press [ ] for Language.
1
The system plays:
To program Language Mode, press 1. To program System
Language, press 2. If finished, press * #.
3. Press [
2
] for System Language.
The system plays:
To program
If finished press * #.
To program Primary Language, press 1.
Secondary Language, press 2.
4.
Press [
1
] for Primary Language.
The system plays:
2.
To modify Primary
To play Primary Language, press
Language, press 6.
If finished press * #.
5. Press [ 2 ] to play the Primary Language.
The system plays:
Primary Language is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the
To play Primary Language, press 2.
current language).
If finished,
To modify Primary Language, press 6.
press * #.
6. At this point, do one of the following:
—
To change the Primary Language, go to Step 5 of “Modifying the
Primary Language.”
—
Press [
quit.
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to
7
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Modifying the Primary Language
Primary Language selected for Bilingual Mode.
When you change the Primary Language, the system uses any recorded
messages already associated with the new Primary Language. After changing
the Primary Language, listen to the Automated Attendant Service Day and Night
Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant; re-record them if necessary.
NOTE:
When you change the Primary Language, the Mailbox Language for any
mailboxes that were left at the factory setting also change to reflect the
new Primary Language. Any mailboxes that were assigned a different
language do not change.
To change the Primary Language:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
Press [
9
] [
9
] [ # ].
c. Enter the Password and press [
d.
#
].
Press [
9
].
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
3.
Press [ ] for Language.
1
The system plays:
To program System
If finished, press * #.
To program Language Mode, press 1.
Language, press 2.
Press [ ] for System Language.
2
The system plays:
To program
If finished, press * #.
To program Primary Language, press 1.
Secondary Language, press 2.
4. Press [ ] for Primary Language.
1
The system plays:
To modify Primary
If finished, press * #.
To play Primary Language, press 2.
Language, press 6.
5.
Press [
6
].
The system plays the current Primary Language, then prompts you to
enter the number corresponding to the desired language.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
6.
Press the number for the language you want to use.
The system plays:
For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current language),
press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.
7. Either:
—
Press [
6
] to cancel your selection.
The system plays:
Primary Language has not been changed.
—
Press [
9
] to confirm your selection.
The system plays:
Primary Language has been changed.
8.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
Playing the Secondary Language
To listen to the current Secondary Language:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
7
7
7
b.
c.
d.
Press [
9
] [
9
] [ ].
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
3.
4.
Press [ ] for Language.
1
The system plays:
To program System
If finished, press * #.
To program Language Mode, press 1.
Language, press 2.
Press [ ] for System Language.
2
The system plays:
To program
If finished, press * #.
To program Primary Language, press 1.
Secondary Language, press 2.
Press [ ] for Secondary Language.
2
The system plays:
To modify
If finished, press * #.
To play Secondary Language, press 2.
Secondary Language, press 6.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
5. Press [ ].
2
The system plays:
Secondary language is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is
the current language). To play Secondary Language,
press 2. To modify Secondary Language, press 6.
If finished, press * #.
6.
At this point, do one of the following:
— To change the Secondary Language, go to Step 5 of “Modifying the
Secondary Language.”
—
Press [
quit.
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to
Modifying the Secondary Language
Secondary Language selected for Bilingual Mode.
When you change the Secondary Language, the system uses any recorded
messages already associated with the new Secondary Language. After
changing the Secondary Language, listen to the Automated Attendant Service
Day and Night Menu Prompts to make sure they are still relevant; re-record
them if necessary.
To change the Secondary Language:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].
d.
Press [
9
].
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
3.
4.
Press [
1
] for Language.
The system plays:
To program System
If finished, press * #.
To program Language Mode, press 1.
Language, press 2.
Press [ 2 ] for System Language.
The system plays:
To program
If finished, press * #.
To program Primary Language, press 1.
Secondary Language, press 2.
Press [ 2 ] for Secondary Language.
The system plays:
To modify
If finished, press * #.
To play Secondary Language, press 2.
Secondary Language, press 6.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
5.
Press [
6
].
The system plays the current Secondary Language, then prompts you to
enter the number corresponding to the desired language.
6. Press the number for the language you want to use.
The system plays:
For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current language),
press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.
7.
Either:
—
Press [
6
] to cancel your selection.
The system plays:
Secondary Language has not been changed.
Press [ 9 ] to confirm your selection.
The system plays:
—
Secondary Language has been changed.
8.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Automated Attendant Service
operation so callers can hear an appropriate prompt in either the System or
Primary Language when they call your company. The voice messaging system
switches to day or night operation depending on the setting of the Night Service
button at extension 10—the receptionist’s extension. You can customize the day
and/or night menu to welcome the caller and offer the caller a list of options for
transferring to a system extension or group, or for hearing an Announcement
that you record. These Announcements can tell callers about your business
hours and location, emergency cover information, and seasonal or special
offers.
You can record up to two Announcements (of up to four minutes each). If the
system is set for Bilingual Mode, you can record up to two Announcements in
each language. Be sure to record the Day and Night Menu Prompts in both the
Primary and Secondary Languages as well. Then callers can press [
switch between the languages.
★
] [ ] to
1
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Programming
Main Menu
(Press
9 )
Automated
Attendant
3 )
(Press
Night Menu
(Press [ 2 ])
Day Menu
(Press [ 1 ])
Yes
Yes
N o
N o
Bilingual
Mode?
Bilingual
Mode?
Play Night
Prompt
Modify Night
Prompt
Play Day
Prompt
Modify Menu
Definition and/or
Day Prompt
(Press [ 6 ])
(Press [ 2 ][ 1 ])
(Press [ 2 ][ 1 ])
(Press [ 6 ])
Play Menu
Definition and
Announcement
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ][ 1 ])
Play Primary
Night Prompt
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ])
Modify Primary
Night Prompt
(Press[ 6 ][ 1 ])
Modify Secondary
Night Prompt
(Press[ 6 ][ 2 ])
Play Secondary
Night Prompt
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ])
Modify Menu
Play Primary
Day Prompt
(Press [ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ])
Definition
and/or Primary
Day Prompt
(Press [ 6 ])
Play Secondary
Day Prompt
Play Menu
Definition and
Announcement
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ])
(Press [ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ])
Play Secondary
Play Primary
Announcement
Announcement
(Press [ 1 ])
(Press [ 2 ])
Figure 5-2 Automated Attendant Service Menu
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
If you need to change current programming for the Automated Attendant
Service, you can use the instructions presented in this section. For example:
■
If you want to change the transfer options available for outside callers,
use “Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and
Announcements” and “Modifying the Night Menu Prompt” for either
Monolingual Mode or Bilingual Mode to update the options, prompts,
and/or Announcements callers hear.
■
If you add a line to the system that requires Automated Attendant
Service, use “Group Call Distribution” to include the new line.
■
If you want to change the way Automated Attendant Service handles
calls, use “VMS Hunt Delay” and/or “VMS Hunt Schedule.”
Menu Definition, Prompt, and Announcements
When the Automated Attendant Service answers a call, the caller hears a menu
prompt that requests the caller to press one or more buttons on the dialpad to
transfer to a specific extension or group of extensions, or to hear an
Announcement. After the caller presses the button(s), the system transfers the
call to the appropriate extension or group, and the caller hears Music On Hold,
tones, ringing, or silence, or an Announcement (depending on how the
communications system is set up). Menu Definition lets you specify the
extensions or groups to which outside callers are transferred or the
Announcements that callers hear.
The voice messaging system uses the Menu Definition for both day and night
operation. To set up the menu, you define digits 1 through 9, called Selector
Codes, for the following types of call transfer:
■
Direct Extension Transfer. This is the factory setting for selector codes
1 through 8. If you use the factory setting, callers can enter an extension
number directly from the menu. For direct extension transfer, the selector
code represents a range of extensions. For example, selector code 1
allows outside callers to transfer directly to any extension that begins with
a 1—extensions 10–19. For selector code 2, outside callers can transfer
directly to any extension that begins with a 2—extensions 20–29, and so
on.
Selector code 9 is different from selector codes 1 through 8. If you leave
selector code 9 at the factory setting, outside callers are transferred
directly to the receptionist’s mailbox where they can leave a message.
This is especially useful for night operation. If you use it, callers are
routed directly to the receptionist’s mailbox—the system does not ring
the extension first.
■
Selector Code Transfer. You can assign any of the selector codes to
one specific extension or group. Then when a caller presses the single-
digit selector code, the system transfers the call to the specific extension
or Calling Group or Hunt Group that you assigned to that digit.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
■
Announcement. You can assign any of the selector codes to an
Announcement number. When a caller presses the single-digit selector
code, the system plays an Announcement (primary or secondary) that
you assigned to that digit. Each Announcement can be up to four
minutes in length. You can set the system to play the Announcement and
hang up or prompt the caller to press [
★
] [
8
] and an extension number.
NOTE:
Depending on your business, you can define the menu so that some options
accommodate callers during normal business hours and other options
accommodate after-hours callers. For example: the ANY Travel Agency wants
to give outside callers the ability to transfer directly to any employee in their
system by dialing the employee’s 2-digit extension number. The company has
employees assigned at extensions 10 through 25. Therefore, the company
leaves Selector Codes 1 and 2 at the factory setting (Direct Extension Transfer).
This leaves Selector Codes 3 through 9 available for Selector Code Transfer. In
this case, ANY Travel Agency assigns Selector Code 3 to extension 21 and
Selector Codes 4 and 5 to Hunt Groups 1 and 2, respectively.
A sample Day Menu Prompt for the ANY Travel Agency follows:
Thank you for calling the ANY Travel Agency.
know the extension of the person you are calling, enter
If you
the extension number now.
To speak with a cruise
specialist, press 3.
For personal travel, press 5.
For corporate travel, press 4.
For assistance, press 0
or,
if you have a rotary phone, stay on the line.
A sample night menu prompt for the ANY Travel Agency follows:
You have reached the ANY Travel Agency. Our business
To leave a
hours are 9 to 5, Monday through Friday.
message, press 9 and we will return your call as soon as
possible. If this is an emergency, press 6 for our
special traveler’s assistance information.
In this case, the caller who needs after-hours assistance can press [ 6 ] to hear
the following Announcement:
If you have misplaced your airline tickets or passport,
missed your flight or limousine pickup, or have any
other travel emergency after ANY Travel’s standard
call 1 800 555 6060 to speak with our
business hours,
special traveler’s assistance program representative.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Other Options
Automated Attendant Service provides the following built-in options—no
programming required—for use in your menu prompt:
■
A third type of transfer option, which is always available to outside and
inside callers, may be useful in certain situations. With this type of
transfer, when callers press [
★
] [
8
], the system prompts them to enter an
extension number. Using the example above, if you assigned Selector
Code Transfer to Selector Codes 1 and 2 (rather than starting the
assignment from 3), you could request callers to press [
them to transfer to extensions 10 to 25.
★
] [ ], to allow
8
■
As shown in the sample Day Menu Prompt, you can also instruct a caller
to stay on the line for assistance. If so, the voice messaging system
automatically transfers the call to the receptionist’s extension. This option
is especially important for callers who have rotary phones.
■
■
As shown in the sample Day Menu Prompt, callers can press [ 0 ] at any
time to transfer automatically to the receptionist’s extension for
assistance.
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, callers can press [
★
] [ ] to switch
1
between the Primary and Secondary Languages. In this case, you must
record two messages for the Day and Night Menu Prompts and
Automated Attendant Announcements: one each in the Primary and
Secondary Languages.
Monolingual Mode
Playing the Menu Definition and
Announcements
This procedure lets you listen to the current Menu Definition and any
Announcement associated with a Selector Code. The Menu Definition is
accessed through the Day Menu.
To play the current menu definition:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
7
7
9
9
#
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].
d. Press [ ].
The system plays the system programming options.
9
2. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.
The system plays:
For the Night Menu,
To program the Day Menu, press 1.
press 2.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Press [ ] for the Day Menu.
1
3.
4.
The system plays:
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.
If finished, press * #.
Press [
2
].
The system plays:
To play the Menu
If finished, press * #.
To play the menu prompt, press 1.
Definition, press 2.
Press [
2
] to play the Menu Definition.
5.
6.
The system plays the current Menu Definition. lf an Announcement is
recorded, the system plays the Selector Code number and associated
Announcement number.
Press [ 1 ] to play or [ # ] to skip the recorded Announcement assigned to
the Selector Code.
The system plays the recorded Announcement and goes to the next
Selector Code.
7. Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
Playing the Day or Night Menu Prompt
To listen to the current Day or Night Menu Prompt:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
9
9
#
c.
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
d. Press [ ].
The system plays the system programming options.
9
2. Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.
The system plays:
For the Night Menu,
To program the Day Menu, press 1.
press 2.
If finished, press * #.
3.
Either:
—
—
Press [
Press [
1
2
] for the Day Menu.
] for the Night Menu.
The system plays:
TO play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.
If finished, press * #.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
4. Press [
2
].
The system plays:
To play the menu prompt, press 1.
To play the Menu
Definition, press 2. If finished, press * #.
5. To play the Menu Prompt, press [ 1 ].
The system plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt depending on your
choice in Step 3.
6.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu
Prompt, and Announcements
voice messaging system to show modifications to the Announcements, if any.
Then use the updated forms while performing the following procedure.
CAUTION:
It is important to understand that you must approve each element (that is,
the Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as
well as save all of these entries (in Step 15). If you exit at any point
before saving your approved entries, your entries will be lost. This
procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete
menu while you are in the process of modifying it.
To change the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompt, and/or Announcements:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.
The system plays:
2.
3.
For the Night Menu,
To program the Day Menu, press 1.
If finished, press * #.
press 2.
Press [
1
].
The system plays:
press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.
To play the menu,
If finished, press * #.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
4.
Press [ ].
6
The system plays:
Please enter a selector code from 1 to 9. When
finished modifying the Menu Definition, press * #.
5.
6.
lf you want to modify only the Day Menu Prompt, go to Step 10.
Otherwise, continue with Step 6.
Enter a Selector Code from 1 through 9.
The system plays the current Selector Code Action (or Announcement
Number and Announcement), then asks:
Press 9 to confirm
Do you want to make a modification?
or 6 to cancel.
7.
8.
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you want to modify this Selector Code.
The system plays:
For selector code transfer, press 1; for announcement,
for direct extension transfer, press 5.
press 3;
At this point, do one of the following:
If you want to return the Selector Code to the factory setting (direct
extension transfer for Selector Code 1 through 8 and transfer to
receptionist’s mailbox for Selector Code 9), press [ 5 ]. Repeat Steps 6
through 8 for each Selector Code you want to modify. Go to Step 10.
—
—
If you want to assign a different extension or group to the Selector
Code, press [ 1 ] then enter the desired extension or group number,
followed by [ # ]. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Selector Code you
want to modify. Go to Step 10.
— If you want to change an Announcement, press [ 3 ]. Go to Step 9.
Enter an Announcement number (1 or 2). Go to Step 11.
The system plays:
9.
press 1; to use existing
To record a new announcement,
press #.
announcement,
10.
Press [
★
] [
#
] to approve your entries and finish modifying the Menu
Definition.
The system plays:
To use
To record a new prompt for this menu, press 1.
the existing prompt and save any Menu Definition
changes, press #.
11. If you do not want to record a new Day Menu Prompt or Announcement,
press [ # ] and go to Step 16; otherwise, continue with Step 12.
12.
To record a new Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, lift the handset,
press [ 1 ], and record after the beep. The prompt or Announcement can
be up to four minutes long.
13. Press [
1
] when you are finished recording.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
14.
Choose an option or skip this step:
—
Press [
2
] [
1
] to immediately re-record the Day Menu Prompt or
Announcement. Begin recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ]
after recording. Repeat, if desired. Otherwise, go to Step 15.
Press [
Repeat, if necessary.
2
] [
3
] to play back the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.
—
—
Press [ ] [ ] to delete the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.
Return to Step 11.
Press [ ] [ ] to approve and save the Day Menu Prompt or
★
3
★
#
15.
16.
Announcement.
The system plays:
Menu Definition saved.
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
Approved.
Press [ ] [
★
7
Modifying the Night Menu Prompt
Night Menu Prompt; then use the updated form while performing the following
procedure.
To change the Night Menu Prompt:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [
Press [ ].
#
].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
Press [ ] for Automated Attendant.
3
2.
3.
The system plays:
To program the Day Menu, press 1. For the Night Menu,
If finished, press * #.
press 2.
Press [ ].
2
The system plays:
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.
If finished, press * #.
Press [ ].
6
4.
The system plays:
To use
To record a new prompt for this menu, press 1.
the existing prompt, press #.
5. Lift the handset, press [ 1 ], and record the Night Menu Prompt.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
6. Press [
1
] when you are finished recording.
7.
Choose an option or skip this step:
—
Press [
2
] [ ] to immediately re-record the Night Menu Prompt. Begin
1
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.
Repeat, if desired.
—
—
Press [
Press [
2
] [
] [
3
] to play back the Night Menu Prompt.
] to delete the Night Menu Prompt.
★
3
The system plays:
Deleted. To record a new prompt for this menu,
To use the existing prompt, press #.
press 1.
Return to Step 5.
Press [ ] [ ] to approve the Night Menu Prompt.
★
#
8.
9.
The system plays:
Approved.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
Bilingual Mode
Playing the Menu Definition and
Announcements
This procedure lets you listen to the current Menu Definition and any
Announcement associated with a Selector Code. The Menu Definition is
accessed through the Day Menu.
To play the current Menu Definition:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2. Press [ ] for Automated Attendant.
3
The system plays:
For the Night Menu,
To program the Day Menu, press 1.
If finished, press * #.
] for the Day Menu.
The system plays:
press 2.
3.
Press [
1
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.
If finished, press * #.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
4.
Press [ ].
2
The system plays:
To play the menu prompt, press 1. To play the Menu
Definition, press 2. If finished, press * #.
Press [ 2 ] to play the Menu Definition.
5.
6.
The system plays the current Menu Definition. lf an Announcement is
recorded, the system plays the Selector Code and associated
Announcement number.
Either:
— Press [ # ] if you do not want to listen to the Announcement and go to
the next Selector Code.
—
Press [ 1 ] to play the Primary Language Announcement assigned to
the Selector Code.
—
Press [ 2 ] to play the Secondary Language Announcement assigned to
the Selector Code.
The system plays the recorded Announcement.
7. Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
Playing the Day and Night Menu Prompts in the
Primary and Secondary Languages
To listen to the current Day or Night Menu Prompts in the Primary and
Secondary Languages selected for Bilingual Mode:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
b . Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
c .
d.
Enter the Password and press [
Press [ ].
#
].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.
2.
3.
The system plays:
To program the Day Menu, press 1. For the Night Menu,
If finished, press * #.
press 2.
Either:
—
—
Press [
Press [
1
2
] for the Day Menu.
] for the Night Menu.
The system plays:
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.
If finished, press * #.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
4.
5.
Press [
2
].
The system plays:
To play the Menu
If finished, press * #.
To play the menu prompt, press 1.
Definition, press 2.
Press [
1
] to play the menu prompt.
The system plays:
To play
If finished,
To play Primary Language prompt, press 1.
Secondary Language prompt, press 2.
press * #.
6.
Either:
— Press [ 1 ] for the Primary Language prompt.
— Press [ 2 ] for the Secondary Language prompt.
The system plays the Day or Night Menu Prompt (depending on your
choice in Step 3) in either the Primary or Secondary Language
(depending on your choice in Step 6).
7.
8.
Repeat Step 6 to play the Day or Night Menu Prompt in the other
language.
Press [
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Modifying the Menu Definition, Day Menu
Prompts, and Announcements
for the voice messaging system to show modifications to the Automated
Attendant Announcements. Then use the updated forms while performing the
following procedure.
CAUTION:
It is important to understand that you must approve each element (that is,
the Menu Definition, the Day Menu Prompt, and any Announcements, as
well as save all of these entries (in Step 21). If you exit at any point
before saving your approved entries, your entries will be lost. This
procedure is designed to ensure that callers do not hear the incomplete
menu while you are in the process of modifying it.
To change the Menu Definition, Day Menu Prompts, and Announcements:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
b.
c.
d.
Press [
9
] [
9
] [
#
].
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
Press [ ] for Automated Attendant.
3
2.
3.
The system plays:
1. For the Night Menu,
#.
To program the Day Menu, press
press 2. If finished, press *
Press [
1
].
The system plays:
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.
If finished, press * #.
4. Press [
6
].
The system plays:
When
Please enter a selector code from 1 to 9.
finished modifying the Menu Definition, press * #.
If you want to modify only the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, go to
Step 10. Otherwise, continue with Step 6.
5.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
6. Enter a Selector Code from 1 through 9.
The system plays the current Selector Code Action (or Announcement
number and Announcement), then asks:
Do you want to make a modification?
or 6 to cancel.
Press 9 to confirm
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you want to modify this Selector Code.
7.
8. At this point, do one of the following:
If you want to return the Selector Code to the factory setting (Direct
Extension Transfer for Selector Code 1 through 8 and transfer to
receptionist’s mailbox for Selector Code 9), press [ 5 ]. Repeat Steps 6
through 8 for each Selector Code you want to modify. Go to Step 10.
—
—
—
If you want to assign a different extension or group to the Selector
Code, press [ 1 ] then enter the desired extension or group number,
followed by [ # ]. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for each Selector Code you
want to modify. Go to Step 10.
If you want to change an Announcement, press [ 3 ]. Go to Step 9.
Enter an Announcement number (1 or 2). Go to Step 11.
The system plays:
9.
to use existing
To record a new announcement, press 1;
announcement,
press #.
] to finish modifying the Menu Definition.
Press [
★
] [
#
10.
The system plays:
To record
To save Menu
To record Primary Language prompt, press 1.
Secondary Language prompt, press 2.
Definition changes, press #.
If you do not want to record a Day Menu Prompt or Announcement, press
[ # ] to approve the Menu Definition and go to Step 21; otherwise, continue
with Step 12.
11.
12. Lift the handset and:
Press [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the
—
Primary Language.
Press [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the
Secondary Language.
—
Record the prompt or Announcement (up to four minutes in length) after
the beep.
13.
14. Press [
1
] when you are finished recording.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
15.
Choose an option or skip this step:
—
Press [
2
] [ ] to immediately re-record this Day Menu Prompt or
1
Announcement. Begin recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ]
after recording. Repeat, if desired. Otherwise, go to Step 16.
—
—
Press [
Press [
2
] [
] [
3
] to play back this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.
] to delete this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.
★
3
Return to Step 12.
16. Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Day Menu Prompt or Announcement.
★
#
The system plays:
Approved.
17. To record the Day Menu Prompt or Announcement in the other language,
repeat Steps 12 through 16.
18.
Do one of the following:
—
—
If you approved the Day Menu Prompt, go to Step 21.
If you approved an Announcement, go to Step 19.
19. Press [
★
★
#
] [
] [
#
#
] to move up a menu level.
Press [
Press [
] to move up another menu level.
20.
21.
] to approve and save all changes.
The new Day Menu Prompts, Announcements, and Selector Code
changes now take effect.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
22.
Modifying the Night Menu Prompts
the Night Menu Prompts; then use the updated form while performing the
following procedure.
To change the Night Menu Prompts:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
b. Press [
9
] [
9
] [
#
].
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].
d.
Press [
9
].
The system plays the system programming options.
Press [ 3 ] for Automated Attendant.
The system plays:
2.
For the Night Menu,
To program the Day Menu, press 1.
If finished, press * #.
press 2.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Press [ ].
2
3.
The system plays:
To play the menu, press 2; to modify the menu, press 6.
If finished, press * #.
4. Press [
6
].
The system plays:
To record
To save any
To record Primary Language prompt, press 1.
Secondary Language prompt, press 2.
recordings, press #.
5. Lift the handset:
—
Press [ 1 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Primary Language.
— Press [ 2 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary
Language.
6. Record the prompt after the beep.
7.
8.
Press [
1
] when you are finished recording.
Choose an option or skip this step:
—
Press [
2
] [
1
] to immediately re-record this Night Menu Prompt. Begin
recording immediately after the beep; press [ 1 ] after recording.
Repeat, if desired.
—
—
Press [
Press [
2
] [
] [
3
] to play back this Night Menu Prompt.
] to delete this Night Menu Prompt.
★
3
The system plays:
To record Primary Language prompt,
To record Secondary Language prompt,
To save any recordings, press #.
Deleted.
press 1.
press 2.
Return to Step 5.
Press [ ] [ ] to approve this Night Menu Prompt.
★
#
9.
The system plays:
Approved.
10. To record the Night Menu Prompt in the other language, repeat Steps 5
through 9.
Press [ # ] to approve all changes.
11.
The new Night Menu Prompts now take effect.
12. Press [ ★ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Group Call Distribution
Use this communications system procedure to specify a new outside line on
which you want Automated Attendant Service.
communications system to show modifications to VMS-AA lines before you
begin.
To assign VMS-AA lines to Hunt Group 7:
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Enter the System Password, if required.
Press [
#
] [
2
] [
0
] [ ]*.
6
At the Group: prompt, press [
7
].
At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-AA line to be programmed as
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned. (Be careful not to
choose 3 VMS Line Cover because you will assign VMS Line
Coverage rather than Automated Attendant Service to the line.)
6.
7. To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate
line number displays.
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
8.
9.
Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for each VMS-AA line.
10. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 0 ] to exit programming.
VMS Hunt Delay
Use this communications system procedure to specify either immediate or
delayed call handling.
to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Delay setting before you begin.
To change the VMS Hunt Delay setting:
1. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
2.
3.
4.
5.
Enter the System Password, if required.
Press [
#
] [
5
] [
0
] [ 6 ].
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.
] [ ] to exit programming.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
0
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Automatic Extension Privacy
If VMS Hunt Delay is set to Immediate, use this procedure to prevent users from
accidentally picking up calls sent to the voice messaging system.
Automatic Extension Privacy (#304) as Assigned for the PARTNER MAIL VS
extensions.
To change the Automatic Extension Privacy setting:
1. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
Enter the System Password, if required.
2.
3.
4.
Press [
#
] [
3
] [
0
] [ 4 ].
Enter the first PARTNER MAIL VS extension number specified on
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
5.
6.
Press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the next PARTNER MAIL VS extension
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
7.
8.
repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each one.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 0 ] to exit programming.
9.
VMS Hunt Schedule
Use this communications system procedure to specify when the
communications system is to route calls to the voice messaging system.
to show modifications to the VMS Hunt Schedule setting before you begin.
To change the VMS Hunt Schedule setting:
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Enter the System Password, if required.
Press [
Press [ Next Data ] until the appropriate value displays.
] [ ] to exit programming.
#
] [
5
] [
0
] [
7
].
Press [ Feature ] [
0
0
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Modifying Mailboxes
The voice messaging system is shipped with mailboxes already created for a
predetermined number of extensions. If a Mailbox Expansion Card is installed,
mailbox capacity is increased. The characteristics of mailboxes are as follows:
■
Receptionist’s Extension. Extension 10 has a maximum storage
capacity of 60 minutes (or 120 messages). Each message has a
maximum length of four minutes.
■
All Other Extensions. Other extensions each have a maximum storage
capacity of 20 minutes (or 40 messages).
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Programming
Main Menu
(Press 9 )
Mailboxes
(Press [ 4 ])
Mailbox Number
(Enter Number
+[ # ])
Mailbox
Number
Exists?
No
Yes
Create
Mailbox
(Press [ 4 ])
Reinitialize
Main Menu
(Press [ 3 ])
Reinitialize
Mailbox
(Press [ 4 ])
Administer
Outcalling
(Press [ 5 ])
Program
Mailbox
Language
(Press [ 6 ])
Delete
Mailbox
(Press[ * ][ 3 ])
Figure 5-3. Modifying Mailboxes
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
If you need to change current mailbox programming, you can use the
instructions presented in this section. For example:
■
If an employee leaves the company, you can set up the previously
assigned mailbox number for a new employee. To do so, use
“Reinitializing a Mailbox,” which returns the mailbox to its factory settings
and deletes any messages that were in the mailbox.
■
If you want to reassign a mailbox (move a mailbox from the current
extension to a different one), first use “Deleting a Mailbox” then use
“Creating a Mailbox.” You may also need to perform these procedures
when you increase the number of mailboxes as the result of upgrading
the PARTNER MAIL VS configuration. Keep in mind that you should
always delete mailboxes from extensions to which you connect auxiliary
equipment (such as doorphones and fax machines) to keep the
maximum number of mailboxes available for subscribers.
■
■
If a subscriber forgets his or her password, use “Reinitializing a
Password” to return the password to the factory setting (1234).
If a subscriber would like to interact with Voice Mail Service using a
language different from the one assigned to his or her mailbox, use
“Modifying a Mailbox’s Language.”
■
If you want to activate or deactivate Outcalling for a subscriber’s mailbox,
Outcalling privileges are denied. Even after you activate Outcalling for a
subscriber’s mailbox, the subscriber must also turn on this feature and
specify an Outcalling number by following the procedure in Using the
PARTNER MAIL VS® Voice Messaging System.
Before you change mailbox assignments, you should review the next two
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Hardware Considerations
After you delete a mailbox, you can reassign that mailbox to another
subscriber’s extension using the “Creating a Mailbox” procedure. Remember
that mailbox numbers and extension numbers are the same. You can also
assign available mailboxes to extensions that do not have phones connected to
them so that guests—employees who work off-premises most of the time, such
After initial installation, you have default mailboxes for a predetermined number
of extensions. When you reassign mailboxes, you can use any mailbox in your
system’s dial plan. The dial plan is the maximum number of extensions
supported by your system. This means on a PARTNER Plus system, you can
create mailboxes for extensions 11 through 33; on a PARTNER Advanced
Communications System, you can create mailboxes for extensions 11 through
41 (on the 5-slot carrier); on a PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 system, you can
create mailboxes for extensions 11 through 57. (Note that the mailbox at
extension 10 cannot be deleted.) Figures 5-4 and 5-5 shows the dial plan for
each system.
PARTNER Plus Control Unit or
PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 Primary Carrier
PARTNER II or PARTNER 48
Expansion Carrier
Line
Jacks
Line
Jacks
Extension
Jacks
Extension
Jacks
206 Modules
206 Modules
Figure 5-4. Dial Plan for PARTNER Plus, PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
PARTNER ACS
2-Slot Carrier
PARTNER ACS
5-Slot Carrier
Line
Jacks
Line
Line
Jacks
Jacks
Line
Jacks
Extension
Jacks
Extension
Jacks
Extension
Jacks
Extension
Jacks
Extension
Jacks
206
Module
206
Modules
Figure 5-5. Dial Plan for PARTNER Advanced Communications Systems
Keep in mind that the modules you have installed in your carrier may differ from
these figures, and will determine the number of extension jacks to which you
can connect phones.
Guest Mailboxes
You can assign available mailboxes to extensions in the dial plan that do not
have phones connected to them. Guest mailboxes are useful for employees
who work off-premises most of the time. Guest mailboxes provide all the
benefits of a regular mailbox (including Outcalling privileges) except the
subscriber does not receive visual indication of a message deposited in the
mailbox since there is no phone (and therefore no message waiting light)
associated with the mailbox. Guests can call the voice messaging system from
any touch-tone phone to retrieve their messages.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Review the following notes before you program guest mailboxes:
■
If you have empty slots in the carrier, you can assign guest mailboxes to
those extensions in the dial plan that correspond to the empty slot(s).
When you assign guest mailboxes, it is recommended that you start
assignments from the high end of the dial plan. (On a PARTNER Plus
system, work backwards from extension 33; on a PARTNER II or
PARTNER 48 system, work backwards from extension 57; on a PARTNER
Advanced Communications System, work backwards from extension 41.)
this section, to assign automatic coverage to the guest mailbox. Calls to
these extensions are routed immediately to the mailbox—the call does
not try ringing the extension first.
■
If you do not have empty slots in the carrier, you can assign guest
mailboxes to the unused extension numbers associated with the voice
messaging system module. You also need to assign automatic coverage
to these guest mailboxes. You can use any of the six extensions on the
voice messaging system module for guest mailbox assignments.
Calls routed to these extensions are routed to the subscriber’s mailbox
depending on the extension used. Refer to the table below to determine
whether calls are routed on an immediate or delayed basis.
For a 2-port system:
If the bottom two extensions are used, calls are routed to the
subscriber’s mailbox on an immediate basis.
—
—
If the remaining four extensions are used, calls are routed to the
subscriber’s mailbox after four rings (or after the number of rings
programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interval).
For a 4-port system:
—
—
If the bottom four extensions are used, calls are routed to the
subscriber’s mailbox on an immediate basis.
If the remaining two extensions are used, calls are routed to the
subscriber’s mailbox after four rings (or after the number of rings
programmed in the VMS Cover Ring Interval).
A 2-port voice messaging system uses the bottom two extension
numbers associated with the slot in which the module is installed (see
and 33. In this case, you can use extensions 28 through 33 for guest
mailboxes.
A 4-port system uses the bottom four extensions (for example, 30, 31, 32,
and 33). In this case, you can use extensions 28 through 33 for guest
mailboxes.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Checking a Mailbox’s Status
Use this procedure to determine if a mailbox exists:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
9
9
#
c.
d.
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
Press [
4
] to program mailboxes.
The system tells you how many mailboxes currently exist and how many
are allowed, then:
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or
press # for the next mailbox.
3. Enter the number of the mailbox whose status you want to check followed
by [ ], or simply press [ ].
#
#
The system responds as follows:
—
If you entered a mailbox number followed by [ # ], the system tells you
whether or not the mailbox exists.
— If you entered [ # ], the system tells you the number of the first existing
mailbox.
4. Press [ # ] repeatedly to hear the next existing mailbox number.
5.
Press [
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
Deleting a Mailbox
deleted; then use the updated form while performing the following procedure.
Review the following notes before you delete a mailbox:
■
The receptionist’s mailbox (at extension 10) cannot be deleted.
■
Any messages in the mailbox are lost when a mailbox is deleted. The
message light is turned off. The personal greeting is lost.
■
If you delete a mailbox from an extension that has VMS Cover assigned,
unassign Automatic VMS Cover or remove the VMS Cover button. This
action prevents unanswered intercom and transferred calls to this
extension from being transferred to the receptionist’s extension.
■
If you delete a mailbox that was assigned a line owner using VMS Line
Cover, either delete line ownership from that line or assign a different
mailbox as the owner of that line. Similarly, if you delete a mailbox that
was assigned a line owner using Extension Line Coverage, either
unassign coverage or assign a different extension as the owner.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
SECURITY ALERT:
As a safeguard against toll fraud, delete unused mailboxes.
To delete a mailbox:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [
Press [ ].
#
].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2. Press [ ] to program mailboxes.
4
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are
allowed, then:
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or
press # for the next mailbox.
3.
Enter the number of the mailbox you want to delete followed by [ # ].
The system says whether or not the mailbox exists, then:
To reinitialize
To administer Outcalling,
To program the Mailbox Language, press 6.
To reinitialize the password, press 3.
the mailbox, press 4.
press 5.
To delete the mailbox, press * D.
4. Press [
★
] [
3
].
The system plays:
Mailbox XX has YY new messages and ZZ old messages. Do
Press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.
you want to delete?
Press [ ] to confirm mailbox deletion.
9
5.
6.
The system plays:
Deleted.
Press [
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Creating a Mailbox
created; then use the updated form while performing the following procedure.
The system is shipped with mailboxes for a predetermined number of
extensions. If you already have the maximum amount of mailboxes, you must
delete an unused mailbox before you can create a new one.
Review the following notes before you create a mailbox:
■
Mailboxes can be created for extensions 11 through 33 for the PARTNER
Plus, 11 through 41 for PARTNER Advanced systems, and 11 through 57
■
When a mailbox is created, it uses the factory set password (1234) and
the factory set Mailbox Language in either the System Language (in
Monolingual Mode) or Primary Language (in Bilingual Mode). The
Mailbox Language can be changed on a per mailbox basis. See
■
You can create a guest mailbox for an extension that does not have a
details.
To create a mailbox:
Access the Programming Main Menu:
1.
a.
b.
c .
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
Press [ ] to program mailboxes.
4
2.
3.
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are
allowed, then:
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or
press # for the next mailbox.
Enter the number of the mailbox you want to create followed by [ # ].
The system plays:
To create this mailbox,
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, or
Mailbox XX does not exist.
press 4.
press # for the next mailbox.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
4.
Press [ ].
4
The system plays:
Created.
5. Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
Reinitializing a Password
If a subscriber forgets the password for his or her mailbox, you can reinitialize
the password to the factory setting of 1234 so the user can retrieve messages.
Remind the subscriber to change the password immediately after logging in for
the first time.
To reinitialize a password to 1234:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2. Press [ ] to program mailboxes.
4
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are
allowed, then:
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or
press # for the next mailbox.
3.
Enter the number of the mailbox whose password you want to reinitialize
followed by [ ].
#
The system plays:
Mailbox XX exists. To reinitialize the password,
press 3. To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox
To delete the mailbox, press * D.
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, Or press #
Language, press 6.
for the next mailbox.
Press [
3
].
4.
5.
The system plays:
The password has been reinitialized.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Reinitializing a Mailbox
To prepare a previously used mailbox for a new subscriber, you can reinitialize
the mailbox. This procedure deletes any messages left in the mailbox and turns
off the phone’s message light (if lit), erases the personal greeting (if recorded),
changes the password back to the factory setting (1234), and changes the
Mailbox Language back to either the System Language (Monolingual Mode) or
the Primary Language (Bilingual Mode).
To reinitialize a mailbox:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
Press [ 4 ] to program mailboxes.
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are
allowed, then:
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or
press # for the next mailbox.
3. Enter the number of the mailbox you want to reinitialize followed by [ # ].
The system plays:
To reinitialize the password,
To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To
Mailbox XX exists.
press 3.
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox
Language, press 6. To delete, press * D. If finished
with this mailbox, press * #, or press # for the next
mailbox.
Press [
4
].
4.
5.
The system plays:
Do you want
Press 9 to confirm or 6
Mailbox XX has YY new and ZZ old messages.
to reinitialize this mailbox?
to cancel.
Press [ ].
9
The system plays:
Reinitialized.
6. Press [
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Playing a Mailbox’s Language
To play the language currently used for a mailbox:
Access the Programming Main Menu:
1.
a.
b.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
c.
d.
Enter the Password and press [
Press [ ].
#
].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
3.
Press [
4
] to program mailboxes.
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are
allowed, then:
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or
press # for the next mailbox.
Enter the number of the mailbox whose language you want to play
followed by [
#
].
The system plays:
To reinitialize the password,
To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To
Mailbox XX exists.
press 3.
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox
Language, press 6. To delete the mailbox, press * D.
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, or press #
for the next mailbox.
4.
5.
6.
Press [
6
].
The system plays:
To play Mailbox Language, press 2. To modify Mailbox
If finished, press * #.
Language, press 6.
Press [ ].
The system plays:
2
Mailbox language is LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the
current language).
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Modifying a Mailbox’s Language
assigned to mailboxes; then use the updated form while performing the
following procedure.
To modify a mailbox’s language:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Press [ Intercom ] [
Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
Press [ ] to program mailboxes.
4
2.
The system tells you how many mailboxes currently exist and how many
are allowed, then:
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or
press # for the next mailbox.
3. Enter the number of the mailbox whose language you want to modify
followed by [ ].
#
The system plays:
Mailbox XX exists. To reinitialize the password,
press 3. To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox
Language, press 6. To delete the mailbox, press * D.
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, or press #
for the next mailbox.
4. Press [ ].
6
The system plays:
To play Mailbox Language, press 2 To modify Mailbox
Language, press 6. If finished, press * #.
Press [
6
].
5.
The system plays the current Mailbox Language, then prompts you to
enter the number corresponding to the desired language.
6. Enter the number corresponding to the language you want to use for this
mailbox.
The system plays:
For LANGUAGE (where LANGUAGE is the current language),
press 9 to confirm or 6 to cancel.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
7.
Either:
—
Press [
9
] to confirm.
The system plays:
Mailbox Language has been changed.
—
Press [ ] to cancel.
6
The system plays:
Mailbox Language has not been changed.
8.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
Administering Outcalling for a Mailbox
The Outcalling feature dials a telephone or pager number to notify a subscriber
that a new message has arrived in the subscriber’s voice mailbox. With this
feature subscribers can be alerted to the arrival of new messages whether
they’re at their desks, on the road, or at an alternate work location. And
subscribers can determine the schedule for when Outcalling begins and ends.
Before subscribers can turn on Outcalling, specify the Outcalling number, and
establish an Outcalling schedule (optional), you must assign Outcalling
privileges for their mailboxes. You may also remove Outcalling privileges by
current status of Outcalling privileges for each mailbox.
CAUTION:
Before you assign mailboxes Outcalling privileges, you should review the
There are no restrictions on the Outcalling Numbers entered by
subscribers. Therefore, it is strongly recommended that you limit the
number of subscribers who have the Outcalling privilege. And call
restrictions should be used for the communications system. See
To assign or remove Outcalling privileges for a mailbox:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
7
7
7
Press [
9
] [
9
] [ # ].
b.
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].
d. Press [ ].
The system plays the system programming options.
9
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Press [ 4 ] to program mailboxes.
2.
The system tells you how many mailboxes exist and how many are
allowed, then:
Please enter the mailbox number followed by # or
press # for the next mailbox.
3.
Enter the number of the mailbox for which you want to activate/deactivate
Outcalling privileges followed by [ # ].
The system plays:
Mailbox XX exists. To reinitialize the password,
press 3. To reinitialize the mailbox, press 4. To
administer Outcalling, press 5. To program the Mailbox
Language, press 6. To delete the mailbox, press * D.
If finished with this mailbox, press * #, or press #
for the next mailbox.
4. Press [ 5 ] to administer Outcalling.
The system plays:
To turn on Outcalling, press 9. To turn off
Outcalling, press 6.
5.
Either:
—
Press [
9
] to activate Outcalling.
The system plays:
Outcalling is turned on.
Press [ 6 ] to deactivate Outcalling.
The system plays:
—
Outcalling is turned off.
6. To activate/deactivate Outcalling for another mailbox, repeat steps 3
through 5.
7.
Press [ ★ ] [ 7 ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Automatic VMS Cover
Use this communications system procedure to assign automatic voice mail
coverage to the appropriate extensions.
you begin.
To assign Automatic VMS Cover to extensions:
1. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
Enter the System Password, if required.
2.
3.
Press [
#
] [
3
] [
1
] [ 0 ].
4. Enter the number of the extension to be covered by the voice messaging
system.
Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 1 Assigned.
5.
6.
To program another extension, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the
extension number shows on the display. Then repeat Step 5.
7. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] to exit programming mode.
VMS Cover Rings
Use this communications system procedure* to change the number of times
calls should ring at the extension before they are sent to the subscriber’s
mailbox.
before you begin.
To change the number of times calls ring before they are sent to the voice
messaging system:
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
1.
2.
3.
Enter the System Password, if required.
Press [
#
] [
1
] [
1
] [ ].
7
4. Enter the VMS Cover Rings setting.
5. Select another procedure or exit programming mode.
*
VMS Cover Rings (#117) is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide
for the communications system.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Line Coverage
This feature lets callers who call in on a covered line leave messages in the
mailbox of a specific subscriber. Line coverage typically is used for personal
lines or outside access to the voice messaging system if Automated Attendant
Service is not used.
There are two ways to set up line coverage:
■
For VMS Line Coverage, you must program the voice messaging
system’s Line Ownership feature and the communication system’s Group
Call Distribution (#206)* feature.
With this method, when a call on a covered line is not answered within
five rings, the voice messaging system routes the caller to the line
owner’s mailbox. The caller then hears the personal greeting for the line
owner’s mailbox.
■
For Extension Line Coverage, you only need to program the
communication system’s Line Coverage Extension (#208)† feature.
This method provides flexibility for calls ringing on covered lines. You can
specify the number of times calls ring at the user’s extension before
going to the user’s mailbox (using the communication system’s VMS
Cover Rings (#117)† feature). In addition, if the user’s extension has Do
Not Disturb on, calls on the line can go immediately to coverage.
For both types of line coverage, voice mail coverage must be on at the user’s
extension.
IMPORTANT:
A line can be assigned coverage as described in this section or it can be
assigned Automated Attendant Service coverage—a single line cannot
be assigned both types of coverage.
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
Line Coverage Extension (#208) and VMS Cover Rings (#117) are not available on all systems
†
Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
VMS Line Coverage
If you specify VMS Line Coverage for any system lines, you must assign an
owner to the covered lines to prevent the system from transferring callers who
call in on those lines to the receptionist’s extension.
This section provides instructions on how to:
■
Use Line Ownership (see Figure 5-6) to scan, assign, modify, and delete
current assignments for VMS Line Coverage
■
Use Group Call Distribution to specify new lines for VMS Line Coverage
Programming
Main Menu
(Press
)
9
Line Ownership
(Press [ 6 ])
Delete Line
Ownership
Scan Line
Ownership
(Press [ 2 ])
Modify Line
Ownership
(Press [ 6 ])
Assign Line
Ownership
(Press [ 4 ])
(Press[ ][ 3 ])
★
Figure 5-6. Line Ownership
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Scanning Line Ownership
To review the current owners of outside lines:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
] [ ] [ ] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
7
7
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
c.
d. Press [
The system plays the system programming options.
9
].
2.
Press [
6
] for line ownership.
The system plays:
To scan line ownership, press 2; to assign line
ownership, press 4; to modify line ownership, press 6.
To delete line ownership, press * D.
3. Press [
2
].
The system plays:
Please enter the CO line number followed by #, or
press # for the next line owner.
4. Enter a specific outside line number followed by [ # ], or press [ # ] for the
first outside line number that has been assigned an owner.
The system responds as follows:
—
If you entered a line number followed by [ # ], the system tells you
whether or not an owner is assigned.
If you entered [ # ], the system tells you the mailbox number of the
owner of the first outside line that has an owner.
—
5.
Press [ # ] to hear the mailbox number for the next outside line that has an
owner.
6. Press [
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Assigning Line Ownership
requires coverage and the line owner’s extension number; then use the updated
To associate an outside line with a specific subscriber’s mailbox:
1.
Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
9
9
#
Enter the Password and press [
#
].
c.
d.
Press [
9
].
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
Press [
6
] for line ownership.
The system plays:
To scan line ownership, press 2; to assign line
ownership, press 4; to modify line ownership, press 6.
To delete line ownership, press * D.
3. Press [ ].
4
The system plays:
Please enter the CO line number followed by #. If
finished, press * #.
4.
Enter the number of the outside line that you want to associate with a
specific subscriber’s mailbox followed by [ # ].
If the line already has an owner, the system announces the mailbox
number of that owner. Otherwise, the system plays:
CO line X has no owner. Entre the mailbox number of
the new line owner followed by #. If finished,
press * #.
5. Enter the mailbox number followed by [ # ].
The system plays:
CO Line X owner is mailbox YY.
earlier in this chapter for instructions on creating mailboxes.
6.
7.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you assign line ownership for all of the
appropriate lines.
Press [
★
] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
7
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Modifying Line Ownership
ownership; then use the updated form while performing the following
procedure.
To change line ownership:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a.
b.
Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
Press [
9
] [
9
] [ # ].
c. Enter the Password and press [ # ].
d. Press [ ].
The system plays the system programming options.
9
2.
Press [
6
] for line ownership.
The system plays:
To scan line ownership, press 2; to assign line
ownership, press 4; to modify line ownership, press 6.
To delete line ownership, press * D.
3.
4.
Press [ ].
6
The system plays:
Please enter the CO line number followed by #.
If finished, press * #.
Enter the number of the outside line whose ownership you want to modify
followed by [
#
].
If the line does not have an owner, the system tells you so. Otherwise, the
system plays:
CO line X owner is mailbox YY. Enter the mailbox
number of the new line owner followed by #. If
finished, press * #.
5. Enter the new mailbox number followed by [ # ].
The system plays:
CO Line X owner is mailbox YY.
earlier in this chapter for instructions on creating mailboxes.
6.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to modify the line ownership for any other lines.
7. Press [ ] [ ] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
★
7
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Deleting Line Ownership
assignments you want to delete; then use the updated form while performing
the following procedure.
NOTE:
If you remove line ownership, either use Group Call Distribution (#206) to
remove VMS Line Coverage from the line or assign a new mailbox
number as the owner of the line to prevent the system from transferring
callers who call in on the covered line to the receptionist’s extension.
To delete an existing line owner assignment:
1. Access the Programming Main Menu:
a. Press [ Intercom ] [
b. Press [ ] [ ] [ ].
7
] [
7
] [
7
] or the programmed VMMsgs button.
9
9
#
c.
d.
Enter the Password and press [ # ].
Press [ ].
9
The system plays the system programming options.
2.
Press [ ] for line ownership.
6
The system plays:
To scan line ownership, press 2; to assign line
ownership, press 4; to modify line ownership, press 6.
To delete line ownership, press * D.
3. Press [
★
] [ 3 ].
The system plays:
Please enter the CO line number followed by #.
If finished, press * #.
4. Enter the number of the outside line whose ownership you want to delete
followed by [
#
].
The system responds as follows:
—
—
If the line has an owner, the system tells you the mailbox number of
the owner and asks you to confirm the deletion. Go to Step 5.
If the line has no owner, the system tells you so and asks you to enter
another CO line number. Enter another line number followed by [ # ] or
go to Step 7.
Press [ 9 ] to confirm that you want to delete the ownership assignment.
5.
6.
The system plays:
Deleted.
Repeat Steps 4 and 5 to delete other line ownership assignments.
7. Press [
★
] [
7
] to return to the Programming Main Menu or hang up to quit.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Group Call Distribution
Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside lines for VMS Line
Coverage.
communications system to show modifications to VMS-MAIL lines before you
begin.
To modify VMS-MAIL lines assignments:
1. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
2. Enter System Password, if required.
3. Press [
#
] [
2
] [
0
] [ 6 ]*.
4.
5.
At the Group: prompt, press [ 7 ].
At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-MAIL line to be programmed as
6. Press [ Next Data ] until the display reads 3 VMS Line Cover or 2 Not
Assigned. (Be careful not to choose 1 Assigned because you will
assign Automated Attendant Service coverage rather than ownership to
the line.)
7. To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate
line number displays. Then press [ Next Data ] until 3 VMS Line Cover or
Not Assigned is displayed.
2
8. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] to exit programming.
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Extension Line Coverage
After assigning Extension Line Coverage, make sure VMS coverage is on for the
later in this chapter.
Use this procedure to modify the assignment of outside lines for Extension Line
Coverage*.
specific extensions:
1. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ].
2. Enter System Password, if required.
3.
Press [
#
] [
2
] [
0
] [ 8 ].
4. At the Line: prompt, enter the first VMS-MAIL line to be programmed
as indicated by the extension number in the Line Coverage column of
At the Data: prompt, enter the number of the extension in the VMS-MAIL
5.
column.
6.
To program another line, press [ Next Item ] or [ Prev Item ] until the appropriate
line number displays. Then repeat Step 5.
7. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 0 ] to exit programming.
*
This feature is not available on all systems. Check the Programming and Use guide for the
communications system.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Telephone Button Programming
change button programming for a subscriber’s extension.
It is recommended that the following features be programmed on buttons on
each subscriber’s system phone:
■
VMS Cover allows the subscriber to manually turn on and off voice mail
coverage.
■
Do Not Disturb allows the subscriber to send callers to his or her mailbox
immediately without first ringing the subscriber’s extension.
■
Voice Mailbox Transfer allows the subscriber to transfer callers directly to
other subscribers’ voice mailboxes.
■
VM Messages allows the subscriber to access the voice messaging
system for message retrieval with the touch of a button.
The procedures in this section use Centralized Telephone Programming.
VMS Cover
To give a subscriber the ability to turn voice mail coverage on and off, you can
program a VMS Cover button on the subscriber’s system phone.
To program a VMS Cover button:
1. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.
2.
3. Press a programmable button with lights.
Press [ Feature ] [
1
] [
5
]*.
4.
5.
Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ ] to exit
0
programming mode.
6. Label the button at the user’s extension.
*
In some countries, the feature code for VMS Cover is [ 1 ] [ 6 ]. Check the Programming and Use
guide for the communications system.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Do Not Disturb
Used in conjunction with either automatic or manual extension coverage, this
button lets subscribers send callers immediately to their voice mailbox.
To program a Do Not Disturb button:
1.
2.
3.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.
Press a programmable button with lights.
4. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 1 ].
5.
Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ 0 ] to exit
programming mode.
6.
Label the button at the user’s extension.
Voice Mailbox Transfer
A Voice Mailbox Transfer button lets any system user transfer calls directly to
another subscriber’s mailbox, without ringing the extension. If, for example, a
caller wants to talk to a subscriber who is on vacation, the receptionist can
transfer the call directly to the subscriber’s mailbox by pressing this button and
entering the subscriber’s extension number (or pressing an Auto Dial button).
The voice messaging system answers the call, the caller hears the subscriber’s
personal greeting (if recorded), and the caller can then leave a message for the
subscriber.
To program a Voice Mailbox Transfer button:
1. Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].
2.
3.
4.
5.
Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.
Press a programmable button.
Press [ Feature ] [
1
] [ 4 ]*.
Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ ] to exit
0
programming mode.
6.
Label the button at the user’s extension.
*
In some countries, the feature code for Voice Mailbox Transfer is [ 1 ] [ 5 ]. Check the Programming
and Use guide for the communications system.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Management
Voice Mail Messages
This intercom Auto Dial button allows the subscriber to access the voice
messaging system with one touch of a button.
To program a Voice Mail Messages button:
1.
Press [ Feature ] [
0
] [
0
] [ System Program ] [ System Program ] [ Central Tel Program ].
2. Enter the number of the extension to be programmed.
3. Press a programmable button.
4. Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [ 7 ].
Program another button for this extension or press [ Feature ] [
0
] [ ] to exit
0
5.
programming mode.
6. Label the button at the user’s extension.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
6
Contents
■
Outside Callers Hear Silence, Tones, or Ringing During
Transfer
6-3
■
Menu Prompt
6-3
■
Recording
6-6
■
6-8
Subscriber
6-i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
6
When You Need Help
If you have a problem with your system, you may be able to solve it yourself by
following the appropriate troubleshooting procedures described in this chapter.
If not, you can call for help: in the continental U.S., call the Technical Service
Center at 1 800 628-2888; outside the continental U.S., call your Lucent
Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer.
The following sections describe various difficulties that might occur, possible
causes for the difficulty, and procedures you can follow to try to solve the
problem.
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Automated Attendant Service
Outside Callers Hear Ringing, but System Does
Not Answer
Possible Cause 1: This is normal when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are
busy.
What to do: There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a
PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy. For example, you can recommend that
users access the Tutor Service feature during non-peak calling hours, you can
reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu, or you
can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt.
Possible Cause 2: The PARTNER MAIL VS module may not be installed
correctly.
What to do: Check the PARTNER MAIL VS module to make sure it is securely
mounted in the control unit. Also check the module’s LEDs: the Power LED
should be steady green and the Status LED should not be lit.
If the Power and Status LEDs are lit, perform the System Save Reset All
procedure by entering 989-RESET (989-73738) after you log in as the System
Manager.
If the Power LED is not lit, power down the control unit, reseat the PARTNER
MAIL VS module, and power up the control unit.
■
If the module is working properly after one minute, the problem is solved.
■
If the module still does not work properly, go to Possible Cause 3.
Possible Cause 3: The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correctly.
numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module. Then use
Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to
Hunt Group 7.
■
If Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions, assign the
correct extension numbers.
■
If Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions, call for help*.
*
In the continental U.S., help is available at 1 800 628-2888. Outside the continental U.S., call
your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Outside Callers Hear Silence, Tones, or Ringing
During Transfer
Possible Cause: Music On Hold is not set up for the system.
What to do: See Music On Hold (#602) in the Programming and Use guide for
the communications system.
System Does Not Answer Immediately
Possible Cause 1: Automated Attendant Service is programmed for Delayed
call handling.
What to do: If you do not want Delayed call handling, program the
communications system’s VMS Hunt Delay feature for Immediate call handling.
Possible Cause 2: The PARTNER MAIL VS extensions may be busy.
What to do: There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a
PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy. For example, you can recommend that
users access the Tutor Service feature during non-peak calling hours, you can
reduce the number of options in the Automated Attendant Service menu, or you
can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt.
System Cuts Off Part of Greeting
Possible Cause 1: You may have begun recording the greeting too soon.
What to do: Re-record the greeting. After the prompt to record the greeting,
pause a moment before speaking.
Possible Cause 2: A touch-tone signal may have been recorded accidentally
with the greeting.
What to do: Re-record the greeting.
System Transfers Call to Receptionist Before
Playing the Menu Prompt
Possible Cause: The extensions associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS
module were not assigned to Hunt Group 7.
numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module. Then use
Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to
Hunt Group 7.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
System Does Not Transfer Calls Properly
Possible Cause 1: If this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers
calls, the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrectly.
test Automated Attendant Service.
■
If outside calls are not transferred to the correct extension or group,
follow the instructions for “Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt” as
the Menu Definition.
■
If outside calls are transferred to the correct extension or group, go to
Possible Cause 2.
Possible Cause 2: A valid destination was not entered by the caller.
What to do: Make sure a valid destination was entered. Check the Programming
and Use guide for your communications system to determine valid extension
and group numbers.
System Does Not Respond to Entered Digits
Possible Cause 1: System is not receiving touchtones.
What to do: The voice messaging system may not be able to interpret
touchtones while a greeting plays. Wait until the greeting finishes before
entering the touchtones. If you are using a speakerphone, turn off the
microphone.
Possible Cause 2: If this occurs when the Automated Attendant Service answers
calls, the Menu Definition may be programmed incorrectly.
test Automated Attendant Service.
■
If outside calls are not transferred to the correct extension or group,
follow the instructions for “Menu Definition and Day Menu Prompt” as
the Menu Definition.
■
If outside calls are transferred to the correct extension or group, go to
Possible Cause 3.
Possible Cause 3: The line is too noisy.
What to do: Call your local telephone company.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Unanswered Transferred Calls Ring Continually
Possible Cause: In some countries, the telephone company does not always
provide a far-end disconnect signal. This causes the line to remain open even
after the caller hangs up.
What to do: Assign voice mail coverage to all extensions in the system; this is
especially important for extension 10. Also, make sure voice mail coverage is on
at extension 10 at night when no one is around to manually disconnect calls.
The voice messaging system will disconnect any call to an extension that has
voice mail coverage after 15 seconds of silence.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Call Answer Service
Call Answer Service Takes Too Long to Answer
Calls
Possible Cause: Calls ring four times at a subscriber’s extension to give the
subscriber a chance to answer the call.
What to do: Recommend that subscribers program a Do Not Disturb button on
their system phones. They should turn on the feature when they leave their
desks or whenever they are too busy to answer calls. Calls to extensions with
Do Not Disturb on are answered immediately.
Call Answer Service Terminates Message While
Caller Is Recording
Possible Cause: The caller’s recording time exceeded the mailbox’s message
time limit. (The time limit for recording a message is four minutes.)
What to do: Let the caller know the recording time limit. Also let the caller know
that he or she can press [ ★ ] [ 8 ] and the appropriate extension number to transfer
to the extension again—this avoids making another outside call—to finish the
message if necessary.
Messages Cannot Be Deposited in Mailbox
Possible Cause: The mailbox is full.
What to do: Old messages must be deleted regularly from mailboxes. When a
subscriber’s mailbox is full, the caller cannot leave a message in that mailbox
but is given the option of transferring to another extension. For all subscribers,
mailboxes can store up to 20 minutes of recorded messages (or 40 messages,
whichever is reached first). The receptionist’s mailbox at extension 10 can store
up to 60 minutes of recorded messages (or 120 messages).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Voice Mail Service
Subscriber Unable to Log In to Voice Mail
Possible Cause 1: A subscriber entered the number of a mailbox that does not
exist.
What to do: Make sure the subscriber enters an existing mailbox number. Use
mailboxes.
■
If the subscriber tries again and succeeds, the problem is solved.
■
If the subscriber still cannot log in, go to Possible Cause 2.
Possible Cause 2: The subscriber forgot his or her password or entered it
incorrectly.
What to do: The subscriber should try entering the password again.
■
If the subscriber can log in, the problem is solved.
■
If the subscriber still cannot log in, re-initialize the password as
must call for help*.)
Date or Time in Message Headers Is Incorrect
Possible Cause: The day, date, or time programmed for the communications
system is incorrect or the PARTNER MAIL VS system was not updated with the
correct time.
What to do: Refer to System Date (#101), System Day (#102), or System Time
(#103) in the Programming and Use guide for the communications system to
check the day, date, or time settings. If the day, date, and time are correct,
choose one of these procedures and re-enter the correct value. After one
minute, this updates the day, date, and time on the voice messaging system. If
message headers for new messages are still incorrect, call for help*.
*
In the continental U.S., help is available at 1 800 628-2888. Outside the continental U.S., call
your Lucent Technologies Representative or local Authorized Dealer.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Subscriber Cannot Forward Messages to Another
Subscriber
Possible Cause 1: The recipient’s mailbox is full or does not have enough
space remaining to accommodate the message.
What to do: Old messages must be deleted regularly from mailboxes. When a
subscriber’s mailbox is full, the caller cannot leave a message in that mailbox
but is given the option of transferring to another extension. The sender cannot
resend the forwarded message until the mailbox has more message space. For
all subscribers, mailboxes can store up to 20 minutes of recorded messages (or
40 messages). The receptionist’s mailbox at extension 10 can store up to 60
minutes of recorded messages (or 120 messages).
Possible Cause 2: The message has been forwarded the maximum of 13 times.
What to do: Verify the number of times the message has been forwarded.
Subscribers Hear Busy Signal When Calling In
to Voice Mail
Possible Cause 1: This is normal when the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions are
busy.
What to do: There are a number of ways to reduce the amount of time a
PARTNER MAIL VS extension is busy. For example, you can recommend that
users access the Tutor Service feature during non-peak calling hours, you can
reduce the number options in the Automated Attendant Service menu, or you
can reduce the length of the Automated Attendant Service menu prompt. If you
have a 2-port system, you may want to consider upgrading to a 4-port system.
Possible Cause 2: The PARTNER MAIL VS module may not be installed
correctly.
What to do: Check the PARTNER MAIL VS module to make sure it is securely
mounted in the control unit. Also check the module’s LEDs: the Power LED
should be steady green and the Status LED should not be lit.
If the Power and Status LEDs are lit, perform the System Save Reset All
procedure by entering 989-RESET (989-73738) after you log in as the System
Manager.
If the Power LED is not lit, power down the control unit, reseat the PARTNER
MAIL VS module, and power up the control unit.
■
If the module is working properly after one minute, the problem is solved.
■
If the module still does not work properly, go to Possible Cause 3.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Possible Cause 3: The PARTNER MAIL VS may not be programmed correctly.
numbers that are associated with the PARTNER MAIL VS module. Then use
Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to verify that the VMS extensions are assigned to
Hunt Group 7.
■
If Hunt Group 7 does not have the correct VMS extensions, assign the
correct extension numbers.
■
If Hunt Group 7 has the correct VMS extensions, call for help*.
Message Light Does Not Turn Off
Possible Cause: There are messages in the mailbox. The message light stays
on if there are any new (unretrieved) messages in the mailbox.
What to do: Retrieve or delete all new messages from the mailbox.
Outcalling Is Delayed
Possible Cause 1: There is heavy call traffic and Outcalling volume on the mail
system. The Outcalling port is also used in call handling. If your system
performs heavy Outcalling or has heavy call volume, the port may frequently be
unavailable for Outcalling.
What to do: You may need more ports (if you have a 2-port system), or you
may need to reduce the number of subscribers who have Outcalling privileges.
Outcalling to a Digital Pager Is Not Working
Possible Cause 1: The Outcalling number is not properly programmed.
What to do: Check that the Outcalling number is correct. If not, reprogram the
number.
Possible Cause 2: Insufficient number of pauses in Outcalling number.
What to do: It is important to include a sufficient number of pauses between the
pager number and the Personal Identification Number (PIN), or between the
pager number and the callback number. Leave several pauses after the pager
number. You must allow enough time for the paging system to answer before
the PIN and/or callback number is dialed.
In addition, a pause should follow the “9” dialed to get an outside line. And if the
communications system is set to rotary (rather than touchtone) service, pauses
may need to be included after every digit in the Outcalling number.
*
In the continental U.S., help is available at 1 800 628-2888. Outside the continental U.S., call
your Lucent Technologies Representative or Authorized Dealer.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Possible Cause 3: A line may not be available to place a call.
What to do: If all lines are in use when the system attempts to outcall, the
outcall does not go through. The mail system attempts to outcall three times
within a minimum time interval of 15 minutes between attempts. When
subsequent attempts are made during a peak line-activity period, these
attempts may be delayed much longer. And if the subscriber’s Outcalling
Schedule end time occurs before the additional attempts, these attempts will
not be made by the system. You may need to obtain more lines if the problem
occurs frequently.
Possible Cause 4: The message was received outside the hours programmed
in the subscriber’s Outcalling Schedule, or the Outcalling period was ended.
What to do: This is standard operation. Outcalling is performed only during the
hours specified by the subscriber’s Outcalling Schedule. Outcalling will be done
only for message received during the Outcalling period.
Possible Cause 5: Outcalling may not be turned on.
What to do: Have the mailbox owner verify that Outcalling is turned on. The
System Manager should also verify that the Outcalling privilege is assigned.
Outcalling to a Telephone Is Not Working
Possible Cause 1: The Outcalling number is not properly programmed.
What to do: Check that the Outcalling number is correct. If not, reprogram the
number.
Possible Cause 2: A line may not be available to place a call.
What to do: If all lines are in use when the system attempts to outcall, the
outcall does not go through. The mail system attempts to outcall three times
within a minimum time interval of 15 minutes between attempts. When
subsequent attempts are made during a peak line-activity period, these
attempts may be delayed much longer. And if the subscriber’s Outcalling
Schedule end time occurs before the additional attempts, these attempts will
not be made by the system. You may need to obtain more lines if the problem
occurs frequently.
Possible Cause 3: The message was received outside the hours programmed
in the subscriber’s Outcalling Schedule, or the Outcalling period was ended.
What to do: This is standard operation. Outcalling is performed only during the
hours specified by the subscriber’s Outcalling Schedule. Outcalling will be done
only for message received during the Outcalling period.
Possible Cause 4: Outcalling may not be turned on.
What to do: Have the mailbox owner verify that Outcalling is turned on. The
System Manager should also verify that the Outcalling privilege is assigned.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Language
Cannot Switch Between Primary and Secondary
Languages
Possible Cause: The system is set for Monolingual Mode.
the system’s Language Mode.
Cannot Understand Language Prompts
Possible Cause: Either a language you do not understand was inadvertently
chosen while programming, or you do not understand the factory-set language.
What to do: To change the language to one you understand, do one of the
following:
■
If the system is set for Monolingual Mode:
Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [ ].
7
a.
b.
c.
Press [
9
] [
9
] [
#
].
Enter the System Manager’s Mailbox Password.
d. Press [
9
] [
1
] [
2
] [ 6 ].
e. Press the number corresponding to the desired language.
f .
Press [
9
].
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode:
a.
b.
Press [ Intercom ] [
7
] [
7
] [ 7 ].
Press [
9
] [
9
] [
#
].
c. Enter the System Manager’s Mailbox Password.
d.
Press [
9
] [
1
] [
2
] [
1
] [ 6 ].
e. Press the number corresponding to the desired language.
f .
Press [
9
].
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
A
Capacities
■
Mailboxes
Mail Capacity: Ext. 10, 60 minutes (120 messages);
subscriber, 20 minutes (40 messages)
Message Length: 1 second to 4 minutes
Personal Greeting Length: 1 second to 4 minutes
Answers on this number of rings: 2 (immediate) or 4
(delayed)
■
■
■
Automated
Attendant
■
■
■
Receptionist’s Extension (Dial 0): Extension 10
Dial 0 Timeout: 5 seconds
Dial 0 Timeout Action (day and night): Transfer to
receptionist
■
■
Menu Levels: 1
Menu Options: 9 allowed (5 recommended)
Without Mailbox Expansion Card: 2 voice channels (ports),
10 mailboxes, 240 minutes of voice storage maximum
With Mailbox Expansion Card (Maximum):
System Capacities
Voice Storage
440 minutes
440 minutes
840 minutes
# of Mailboxes
# of Ports
20
20
40
2
4
4
Total Number of Calls Supported During Peak Usage Hour:
†
Calls
4-port
Call Connect Time
2-port
25
12
122
61
0.5 minutes
1 minute
40
8
1.5 minutes
†
Call connect time is an average for all calls to the PARTNER MAIL VS system including Tutor, Automated
Attendant Service, Call Answer Service, and Voice Mail Service. This information assumes a 2% probability of
system blockage.
A -1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Communications
System
The PARTNER MAIL VS system is supported on the following
PARTNER Plus, PARTNER II, PARTNER Advanced, and
PARTNER 48 communications systems:
■
In most countries: Release 3.1 or later of PARTNER Plus,
PARTNER II, and PARTNER 48, and Release 1.0 of
PARTNER Advanced Communications System
■
In United Kingdom: Release 2.0 or later of PARTNER Plus
and PARTNER 48
Languages Supported
■
U.S. English
■
United Kingdom English
■
Latin American Spanish
■
Canadian French
Default Mode:Monolingual
Default Languages:
Monolingual Mode: U.S. English
Bilingual Mode: U.S. English (primary)/Latin American
Spanish (secondary)
■
Dimensions
and Weights
(approx.)
PARTNER MAIL VS: 11”(D) x 17”(H) x 1.5”(W) or 27.9 x
43.2 x 3.8 cm 4.3 lbs or 2.0 kgs
Mailbox Exp. Card: 3.4”(D) x 2.1”(H) x 0.2”(W) or 8.6 x 5.3
■
x 0.5 cm .07 lbs or 32 grams
Electrical
Specifications
15 Watts (52 BTU/hour) during normal and maximum power
consumption
■
Maximum current 0.13 Amps
■
Battery backup compatible
■
68000 microprocessor, 256Kbytes RAM, 512Kbytes ROM
Processors
■
Voice encoding method: Regular Pulse Excitation–Long
Specifications
Term Prediction (RPE–LTP) Linear Predictive Coder
■
Digital Signal Processor (DSP), 16 bit
A-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Environmental
Requirements—
Control Unit
■
■
Mount on a wall at least 2 feet (0.6 meters) from the floor
(wall mounting required)
Locate within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the network interface
jacks and a properly grounded electrical outlet not
controlled by switch, using supplied 7-foot (2.1 meter)
cords
■
■
Mount the Expansion Carrier at least 6” (15.2 cm) and not
more than 24” (61 cm) away from the Primary Carrier
Operating temperature 32° to +104°F (0° to +40°C), not in
direct sunlight
■
■
Humidity 15%-90%, noncondensing
For proper ventilation and easy replacement of modules,
provide at least 6” (15.2cm) clearance at the top and
sides and 2 feet (0.6 meters) at the front and bottom of
the control unit
■
■
Locate in an area free of excess moisture, corrosive
gases, dust and chemicals
Electrical
Requirements
U.S. and Canada: 90–130 VAC, 50–60 Hz, 3-prong outlet
separate ground, separately fused at 15 Amps: Other
countries: 180–264 VAC, 50–60 Hz, fused at 10 Amps
Outlet must not be controlled by an on/off switch
Grounding to comply with Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1459:
■
■
1.
An insulated grounding conductor that is not smaller in
size and equivalent in insulation material and thickness
to the grounded and ungrounded branch circuit
supply conductors, except that it is green with or
without one or more yellow stripes, is to be installed as
part of the circuit that supplies the product or system.
The grounding conductor mentioned in item A is to be
connected to ground at service equipment.
2.
3. The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the
product or system are all to be of a grounding type,
and the grounding conductors serving these
receptacles are to be connected to earth ground at
the service equipment.
■
■
Safety
Requirements
U.S.: Meets UL 1459 Issue 2
Canada: Meets CSA C22.2, 225
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
■
Government
Approvals and
Local Phone
Company
U.S.: FCC Part 68
FCC registration number (U.S.): AS5 USA-61630-KF-E
FCC Part 15 Class A
REN (outside line jack): 0.9A per line jack
Jack type: RJ11C
Information
Loop start lines
■
Canada: IC CP01, Issue 7
IC registration number (Canada): 230 3756A
IC CS03, Issues 6&7
Load Number = 7
Loop start lines
A-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FCC Information
B
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) Interference Information
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instruction manuals, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to
cause harmful interference, in which case the user will have to correct the
interference at his or her own expense.
NOTE:
References to FCC regulations are not applicable outside of the U.S.
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FCC Information
FCC Notification and Repair Information
This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its
rules. In compliance with those rules, you are advised of the following:
■
Means of Connection: Connection to the telephone network shall be
through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C. These USOCs
must be ordered from your local telephone company.
This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines.
■
Notification to the Telephone Companies: Before connecting this
equipment, you or your equipment supplier must notify your local
telephone company’s business office of the following:
The telephone number(s) you will be using with this equipment.
—
—
The appropriate registration number and ringer equivalence number
(REN), which can be found on the right hand side of the primary
carrier.
You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this
equipment is permanently disconnected from the line(s).
■
Repair Instructions: If you experience trouble because your equipment
is malfunctioning, the FCC requires that you disconnect the equipment
from the network and not use it until the problem has been corrected.
Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturer, its
authorized agents, or by others who may be authorized by the FCC. In
the event repairs are needed on this equipment, please contact the
Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center at 1 800 643-2353. For
■
Rights of the Local Telephone Company: If this equipment causes
harm to the telephone network, the local telephone company may
discontinue your service temporarily. If possible, they will notify you in
advance. But if advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as
soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint
with the FCC.
Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities,
equipment, operations, or procedures that affect the proper functioning
of this equipment. If they do, you will be notified in advance to give you
an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted telephone service.
B-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FCC Information
IC Notification and Repair
Information
The Industry Canada (IC) label identifies certified equipment. This certification
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network
protective, operational, and safety requirements. The IC does not guarantee the
equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing the equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to
connect it to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection.
In some cases, the company’s inside wiring for single-line individual service
may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone
extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made
by the user to this equipment, or any equipment malfunctions, may give the
telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe
system, if present, are connected. This precaution may be particularly important
in rural areas.
CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but
should contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or
electrician, as appropriate.
To prevent overloading, the Load Number (LN) assigned to each terminal
device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone
loop used by the device. The termination on a loop may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load
Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.
lC Certification No.: 230 3756A
CSA Certification No.: LR 60486
Load No.: 7
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FCC Information
Renseignements sur la notification du ministére
des Communications du Canada et la réparation
L’étiquette du Ministère des Communications du Canada identifie le matériel
homologué. Cette étiquette certifie que le matériel est conforme à certaines
normes de protection, d’exploitation et de sécurité des réseaux de
télécommunications. Le Ministère n’assure toutefois pas que le matériel
fonctionnera à la satisfaction de l’utilisateur.
Avant d’installer ce matériel, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer qu’il est permis de le
raccorder aux installations de l’entreprise locale de télécommunication. Le
matériel doit également être installé en suivant une méthode acceptée de
raccordement. Dans certains cas, les fils intérieurs de l’enterprise utilisés pour
un service individuel à ligne unique peuvent être prolongés au moyen d’un
dispositif homologué de raccordement (cordon prolongateur téléphonique
interne). L’abonné ne doit pas oublier qu’il est possible que la conformité aux
conditions énoncées ci-dessus n’empêchent pas la dégradation du service
dans certaines situations. Actuellement, les entreprises de télécommunication
ne permettent pas que l’on raccorde leur matériel à des jacks d’abonné, sauf
dans les cas précis prévus pas les tarifs particuliers de ces entreprises.
Les réparations de matériel homologué doivent être effectuées par un centre
d’entretien canadien autorisé désigné par le foumisseur. La compagnie de
télécommunications peut demander à l’utilisateur de débrancher un appareil à
la suite de réparations ou de modifications effectuées par l’utilisateur ou à
cause de mauvais fonctionnement.
Pour sa propre protection, l’utilisateur doit s’assurer que tous les fils de mise à
la terre de la source d’énergie électrique, des lignes téléphoniques et des
canalisations d’eau métalliques, s’il y en a, sont raccordés ensemble. Cette
précaution est particuliérement importante dans les régions rurales.
AVERTISSEMENT:
L’utilisateur ne doit pas tenter de faire ces raccordements lui-même; il doit
avoir racours à un service d’inspection des installations électriques, ou à
un électricien, selon le cas.
L’indice de charge (IC) assigné à chaque dispositif terminal indique, pour éviter
toute surcharge, le pourcentage de la charge totale qui peut être raccordée a
un circuit téléphonique boucié utilisé par ce dispositif. La terminaison du circuit
bouclé peut être constituée de n’importe quelle combinaison de dispositifs,
pourvu que la somme des indices de charge de l’ensemble des dispositifs ne
dépasse pas 100.
No d’homolagation: 230 3756A
No de certification CSA: LR 60486
L’indice de charge: 7
B-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warranty Information
C
Repair Information
Outside the continental U.S., contact your Lucent Technologies Representative
or local Authorized Dealer for warranty and repair information applicable to your
system.
In-Warranty Repairs
If you purchased or leased your system directly from Lucent Technologies,
Lucent Technologies will repair it free of charge during the one-year warranty
period. Simply call the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center and ask
for service.
Business-Day service is standard during the warranty period for both the control
unit and system phones. Business-Day service is performed during normal
business hours. However, if you need 24-hour service protection during the
warranty period on the control unit in case there is a major system failure, you
can purchase an Around-the-Clock service contract from your local Lucent
Technologies sales office. (Around-the-Clock service is not available for
phones.)
If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies
Authorized Dealer, contact your dealer for repairs.
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warranty Information
Post-Warranty Repairs
If you purchased your system from Lucent Technologies and you have a post-
warranty service contact, Lucent Technologies service is provided under the
terms of that contract.
To significantly reduce unexpected repair costs after the warranty period, you
can purchase a post-warranty service contract from Lucent Technologies. If you
do not have a contract, Lucent Technologies service is provided on a time-and-
materials basis by calling the Lucent Technologies Technical Service Center. A
contract provides you, within the applicable coverage period and response
times, service calls with no charge for parts and labor on covered repairs. Both
Business-Day and Around-the-Clock coverages of varying lengths are available.
To order a post-warranty service contract, call 1 800 247-7000 (in the
continental U.S. only).
If you leased your system from Lucent Technologies, Business-Day service
is included in your lease. To upgrade to Around-the-Clock service, call
1 800 247-7000 (in the continental U.S. only).
If you purchased or leased your system through a Lucent Technologies
Authorized Dealer, contact your dealer for repairs.
C-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warranty Information
Lucent Technologies Warranty and
Limitation of Liability
Lucent Technologies warrant you, the customer, that your system will be in
good working order on the date Lucent Technologies or its authorized reseller
delivers or installs the system, whichever is later (“Warranty Date”). If you notify
Lucent Technologies or its Authorized Dealer within one year of the Warranty
Date that your system is not in good working order, Lucent Technologies will
without charge to you repair or replace, at its option, the system components
that are not in good working order. Repair or replacement parts may be new or
refurbished and will be provided on an exchange basis. If Lucent Technologies
determines that your system cannot be repaired or replaced, Lucent
Technologies will remove the system and, at your option, refund the purchase
price of your system or apply the purchase price towards the purchase of
another Lucent Technologies system.
If you purchased your system directly from Lucent Technologies, Lucent
Technologies will perform warranty repair in accordance with the terms and
conditions of the specific type of Lucent Technologies maintenance coverage
you selected. A written explanation of Lucent Technologies’ types of
maintenance coverage may be obtained from Lucent Technologies by calling
1 800 247-7000 (in the continental U.S. only). If you purchased your system
from a Lucent Technologies Authorized Dealer, contact your reseller for the
details of the maintenance plan applicable to your system.
This Lucent Technologies limited warranty covers damage to the system
caused by power surges.
Unless otherwise expressly agreed to in a written agreement signed by Lucent
Technologies, Lucent Technologies will not be responsible under this limited
warranty for damages resulting from:
■
Failure to follow Lucent Technologies’ installation, operation, or
maintenance instructions;
■
Unauthorized system modification, movement, or alteration;
■
Unauthorized use of common carrier communication services accessed
through the system;
■
Abuse, misuse, or negligent acts or omissions of the customer and
persons under the customer’s control; or
■
Act of third parties and acts of God.
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warranty Information
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES’ OBLIGATION TO REPAIR, REPLACE, OR
REFUND, AS SET FORTH ABOVE, IS YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.
EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY SET FORTH ABOVE, LUCENT
TECHNOLOGIES, ITS AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, AND DEALERS MAKE NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Limitation of Liability
Except as provided below, the liability of Lucent Technologies and its affiliates
and suppliers for any claims, losses, damages, or expenses from any cause
whatsoever (including acts or omissions of third parties), regardless of the form
of action, whether in contract, tort, or otherwise, shall not exceed the lesser of:
(1) the direct damages proven; or (2) the repair cost, replacement cost, license
fee, annual rental charge, or purchase price, as the case may be, of the
equipment that directly gives rise to claim. Except as provided below, Lucent
Technologies and its affiliates and suppliers shall not be liable for any
incidental, special, reliance, consequential, or indirect loss or damage incurred
in connection with the equipment. As used in this paragraph, consequential
damages include, but are not limited to, the following: lost profits, lost
revenues, and losses arising out of unauthorized use (or charges for such use)
of common carrier telecommunications services or facilities accessed through
or connected to the equipment. For personal injury caused by Lucent
Technologies’ negligence, Lucent Technologies’ liability shall be limited to
proven damages to person. No action or proceeding against Lucent
Technologies or its affiliates or suppliers may be commenced more than twelve
(12) months after the cause of action accrues. THIS PARAGRAPH SHALL
SURVIVE FAILURE OF AN EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.
C -4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Messaging System
Planning Forms
D
This appendix contains the voice messaging system forms. We suggest you fill
in a photocopy of the form you need, leaving the blank original in the book, in
case you need to make revisions in the future. These forms must be completed
before the voice mail system is installed because they serve as a reference for
the person who installs and programs the system.
It is important to keep an accurate, up-to-date record of the programming for
the voice mail system. If you change the system after installation, you should
update the forms that were used when the system was installed.
NOTE:
Before you begin to fill out the voice mail system Planning Forms, you
need a complete, current copy of the communications system Planning
for completing each form are contained on the form itself.
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Messaging System Planning Forms
How To Use the Forms
The following table shows what voice mail system forms should be completed
according to your voice mail system feature selection:
To
From Programming
Main Menu, press
Use VMS
Form
Select Language Mode, System Language, Primary
and Secondary Language
[
[
[
1
4
3
]
]
]
Assign Mailboxes to subscribers, identify Mailbox
Language and Outcalling privileges
Identify Menu Definition (i.e., Direct Extension
Transfer, Selector Code Transfer), Ext. # or Group #
for Selector Code Transfer, or Annc. #. Required
For Automated Attendant Service.
Script Automated Attendant Announcements (in
System or Primary Language). Required if Annc. #
is assigned to a Selector Code.
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
Script Automated Attendant Announcements (in
Secondary Language). Required for Bilingual
Mode if Annc. # is assigned to a Selector Code.
Script the Day Menu Prompt (in System or Primary
Language). Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set
to Day Only or Always.
Script the Day Menu Prompt (in Secondary
Language). Required for Bilingual Mode if VMS
Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always.
Script the Night Menu Prompt (in System or Primary
Language). Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set
to Night Only or Always.
Script the Night Menu Prompt (in Secondary
Language). Required for Bilingual Mode if VMS
Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always.
Assign Line Ownership (cannot be assigned to lines
assigned Automated Attendant coverage).
Required if VMS Line Coverage exists for one or
more lines.
D -2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 1: Language
Language Mode:
❑
❑
Monolingual
Bilingual
✔
Monolingual Mode–System Language:
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
U.S. English ✔
U.K. English
Latin American Spanish
Canadian French
Other–specify
Bilingual Mode–Primary Language:
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
U.S. English ✔
U.K. English
Latin American Spanish
Canadian French
Other–specify
Bilingual Mode–Secondary Language:
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
U.S. English
U.K. English
Latin American Spanish ✔
Canadian French
Other–specify
Completing this Form
General Information
Language Mode Check “Bilingual” if the Language Mode
■
Factory defaults are identified by the
✔
symbol.
should be set to Bilingual. If you check Bilingual, also see
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, make sure you record
the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu
Prompts and Announcements (if any) in both the Primary and
Secondary Languages. Also, subscribers can record two
personal greetings—one in the Primary Language and another
in the Secondary Language.
below; if not, see
.
Monolingual Mode—System Language Check the Primary
language desired if different from the default.
Bilingual Mode—Primary Language Check the Primary
Language desired if different from the default.
■
Subscribers can have a Mailbox Language different from the
languages selected here. Mailbox Language is specified on
Bilingual Mode—Secondary Language Check the
Secondary Language desired if different from the default.
Programming Language
■
To program the Language Mode, as well as the System
Language in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary
Languages in Bilingual Mode, dial [ 1 ] from the Programming
Main Menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 2: Mailbox Assignments
Mailbox
Language
Mailbox
Subscriber Name
Mailbox
Mailbox
Language
Outcalling
Assigned
Outcalling
Assigned
Subscriber Name
10 ✔
(26
(27
(28
✔
)
(11
(12
(13
(14
(15
(16
(17
(18
(19
(20
(21
(22
(23
(24
(25
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
✔
)
✔
)
)
(29
✔
(30
(31
✔
✔
)
)
(32
(33
(34
(35
(36
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
)
)
(37
✔
)
(38
✔
)
)
)
(39
(40
✔
✔
General Information
Completing this Form
Mailbox To assign a mailbox to an extension other than the
factory default, cross out the factory default and write in the
extension to be used.
■
Factory defaults are identified by the
✔
symbol.
■
■
The system comes with a predetermined number of mailboxes.
The optional Mailbox Expansion Card doubles the capacity.
■
For PARTNER PLUS, use an extension number from 11-33.
Mailbox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and
cannot be changed.
■
For PARTNER Advanced Communications System, use an
extension number from 11-41.
■
■
Mailbox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time. All
other mailboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time.
■
For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48, use an extension number
from 11-57.
For system security, mailboxes should be deleted where they
are not needed; for example, mailboxes should be deleted for
extensions in use by auxiliary equipment (such as a fax or
doorphone) and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt
Group.
To mark an unused mailbox for deletion without assigning an
extension, cross out the factory default.
Subscriber Name For every mailbox in use, write the name of
the mailbox subscriber.
■
Guest mailboxes can be created for users who don’t have their
own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the
mailbox number. Unused extension numbers include: 1) vacant
extension jacks in installed 206 modules and 2) extensions in
your DIAL plan higher than the last extension jack in the last
more information.
Mailbox Language For each mailbox that requires a language
different from the System Language or Primary Language
Outcalling Assigned For each mailbox in use, indicate
whether Outcalling is assigned.
Programming Mailboxes
You can change a mailbox assignment by deleting an existing
mailbox and creating a new one.
■
To program mailboxes, dial [ 4 ] from the Programming Main menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 3: Menu Definition
Required for Automated Attendant Service
Description
Selector
Code
Range of Extensions
for Direct Extension
Transfer
Ext. # or Group # for
Selector Code Transfer,
or Announcement
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(10–19
(20–29
(30–39
(40–49
(50–57
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
)
)
(71–74, 771–776
✔
)
Transfer to Mailbox 10
✔
Completing this Form
General Information
For Direct Extension Transfer...
Factory defaults are identified by the
✔
symbol.
Description Write “Direct Extension Transfer.”
■
■
■
This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu
prompts.
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer
Leave the factory default.
The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in
response to the menu prompts.
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer...Leave blank.
In Direct Extension Transfer, Selector Codes 1–5 and 7
represent the first digit for a range of extensions. These Selector
Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly.
For Selector Extension Transfer...
Write the name of the person or group to receive
Description
the transfer.
■
In Selector Code Transfer, Selector Codes 1–9 represent a
specific extension, Group Calling number, (if available) or Hunt
Group number to which the caller will be transferred. Use the
following values:
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the
corresponding Selector Code to transfer to the extension,
announcement, or group identified in
below.
10–33 or 771–776
PARTNER Advanced: 11–41, 71–74, or 771–776
PARTNER Plus:
Ext. #, or Group # for Selector Code Transfer...Write the
extension, announcement, or group number to receive the
transfer.
10–57, 71–74, or 771–776
10–57, 71, or 771–776
PARTNER II:
PARTNER 48:
For Announcement...
Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a
single extension or group, such as the VP of Sales at extension 37
or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774.
Description Write “Announcement.”
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the
corresponding Selector Code to hear the Announcement
■
■
Selector Code 9 lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10
(receptionist mailbox) where they can leave a message.
identified in
below.
The Description and Selector Code number from this form will
be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts (Forms
Announcement # Write the Announcement number (1 or 2).
■
For Announcement entries in Description, Selector Code, and
Announcement # of this form will be used to complete Forms
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 3: Menu Definition
Programming the Menu
■
To program the menu definition, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming
Main Menu and select the Day Menu.
After defining the menu, the system will prompt you to record the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 3A: Automated Attendant Announcement—
System Language or Primary Language
Required if Selector Code Transfer is set to Announcement
:
Announcement #
Announcement #
:
Completing this Form
General Information
■
Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided.
After the Announcement plays, you can program the system to
hang up or to offer callers the option of pressing *4 (to repeat
this Announcement), *7 (to return to the Main Menu), *8 (to
transfer to an extension), or 0.
Recording the Announcement(s)
■
To record the Announcement, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming
Main Menu.
■
■
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can
switch the language they hear while listening to the
Announcement. For example, “Para español, marque * 1.”
Announcements can supply frequently requested information
so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other
tasks more efficiently.
An Announcement can be up to four minutes long.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 3B: Automated Attendant Announcement—Secondary Language
Required for Bilingual Mode only if Selector Code transfer is set to Announcement
Announcement #
:
Announcement #
:
Completing this Form
General Information
Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided.
After the Announcement plays, you can program the system to
hang up or to offer callers the option of pressing *4 (to repeat
this Announcement), *7 (to return to the Main Menu), *8 (to
transfer to an extension), or 0.
■
Recording the Announcement(s)
■
To record the Announcement, dial [3 ] from the Programming
■
■
■
Let callers know they can switch to the Primary Language while
listening to the Announcement. For example, “For English,
press * 1.”
Main Menu.
Announcements can supply frequently requested information so
that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other
tasks more efficiently.
An Announcement can be up to four minutes long.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 4: Day Menu Prompt—
System Language or Primary Language
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always
Completing this Form
General Information
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the
caller for selecting menu options.
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
Suggested options include:
■
■
■
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
menu options.
■
“Remain on the line for assistance.”
■
“Dial 0 for assistance.”
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency.”
■
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,
“Para español, marque * 1.”
Recording the Day Menu Prompt
■
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
■
Main Menu.
–
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”
–
–
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as “To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 4A: Day Menu Prompt—Secondary Language
Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always
Completing this Form
General Information
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the
caller for selecting menu options.
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
Suggested options include:
■
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
menu options.
■
“Remain on the line for assistance.”
■
“Dial 0 for assistance.”
■
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
■
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency.”
■
Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language.
Recording the Day Menu Prompt
For example, “For English, press * 1.”
■
■
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming
Main Menu.
–
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”
–
–
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as “To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 5: Night Menu Prompt—
System Language or Primary Language
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always
–
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the
receptionist.
General Information
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
■
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
Completing this Form
menu options.
■
■
■
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for
selecting menu options.
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”
Suggested options include:
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,
“Para español, marque * 1.”
■
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”
■
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
Recording the Night Menu Prompt
–
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a
message.”
■
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [3 ] from the
Programming Main Menu.
–
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 5A: Night Menu Prompt—Secondary Language
Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always
–
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the
receptionist.
General Information
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
■
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
Completing this Form
menu options.
■
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for
selecting menu options.
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”
Suggested options include:
■
■
Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language.
For example, “For English, press *1.”
■
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
■
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
–
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a
message.”
Recording the Night Menu Prompt
■
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the
Programming Main Menu.
–
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 6: Line Ownership
Required if VMS Line Coverage exists for one or more lines
Line #
Telephone Number
Line Owner (Subscriber Name)
Mailbox
Completing this Form
General Information
Line # Write the number of the outside line to be covered by
■
Lines in the system are assigned either ownership or
Automated Attendant Service coverage—a single line cannot
be assigned both types of coverage.
the voice mailbox of the line owner.
■
For PARTNER PLUS, specify an outside line number
from 01–12.
■
■
Note that more than one line may be assigned to the same
mailbox, but a single line cannot be assigned to more than one
mailbox.
■
For PARTNER Advanced, specify an outside line number
from 01–15.
Lines that are assigned ownership typically are used for
personal lines or outside access to the voice messaging
system if Automated Attendant Service is not used. If the
company has users who need to access mailboxes when no
one is around to transfer them to their mailboxes, you can set
up the system as follows:
■
For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48 specify an outside line
number from 01–24.
Write the telephone number of the
Telephone Number
outside line to be covered.
Line Owner Write the name of the person responsible for
picking up messages on this line. This is a subscriber from
–
–
Assign extension 10 as owner of the covered lines.
Instruct users to press [ ] [ 7 ] when they hear the personal
greeting from extension 10.
★
Mailbox
Write the mailbox number assigned to the
subscriber.
■
■
See the communications system planning forms to determine
line numbers, telephone numbers, and line owners’ extensions.
Programming Line Ownership
As an alternative to VMS Line Coverage you can use Extension
■
To program line ownership, dial [ 6 ] from the Programming Main
Menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications System
Planning Forms
E
This appendix contains samples of the communications systems Planning
Forms. These forms identify certain features of the communications system that
must be programmed before the voice mail system is installed to ensure that
both systems are integrated and function appropriately.
It is important to keep an accurate, up-to-date record of the programming for
the both systems. If you change the communications system after installation,
you should update the forms that were used when the communications system
was installed and ensure that any corresponding voice mail system forms are
updated accordingly. Samples of the voice mail system Planning Forms are
included in Appendix D.
for completing each form are contained on the form itself.
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Communications System Planning Forms
How To Use the Forms
The following table shows what procedures should be used and to which
communications systems forms they correspond in planning for voice mail
system installation and programming:
To
Use
Complete
Feature/Procedure CS Form
Assign the extensions associated with the VMS
hardware to Hunt Group 7.
Hunt Group
Extensions (#505)
Assign lines to Hunt Group 7 so calls can ring
directly to the VMS and receive Automated
Attendant Service.
Group Call
Distribution (#206)
Identify an extension as an owner of an outside
line so calls on that line can ring directly to the
owner’s voice mailbox when Automatic VMS Cover
or VMS Cover is on at owner’s ext.
Line Coverage
Extension (#208)
VMS Hunt Delay
(#506)
Determine when outside calls should be answered
by the Automated Attendant Service of the VMS
(i.e., immediate or delayed call handling).
Determine when outside calls should ring the VMS VMS Hunt Schedule
(#507)
Hunt Group (always, day only, or night only)
depending on the status of the Night Service
Button at ext. 10.
Automatic VMS
Cover (#310)
Determine whether an extension’s unanswered
intercom and transferred calls and outside calls on
lines assigned ownership are automatically
covered by the VMS.
VMS Cover Rings
(#117)
Specify the number of times intercom and
transferred calls or outside calls on lines assigned
ownership ring at extensions before they are sent
to the VMS.
Transfer Return
Extension (#306)
Identify the extension to which a call transferred by
the VMS should be routed if the destination
extension does not answer and does not have
voice mail coverage active. (The transfer return
extension for the VMS is typically ext. 10).
E-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 2
Form A: System Configuration
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.
For additional instructions, see page 2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Customer Billing Name
Installation Address
Contact Name
6.
Features Customer is most interested in (most important first):
Phone
(
)
–
–
Phone
Phone
Alternate Trainee’s Name
Person to be Trained
–
(
)
(
)
Phone
[ ]
[ ]
Lucent Technologies Sales Force
Dealer:
Salesperson’s Name
5.
Sold by
(
)
–
7. System Lines
Line Coverage—You can select one per line
Write
R if
l
2
1
3
l
l
l
l
l
VMS-
AA
{#206}
AA
Hunt
VMS- 4
Mail
{#206}
Identify other Local Telephone
or Owned Line or Identify Equipment Caller ID Company Subscription Services
(e.g., Repeat Call)
Line Write the Telephone Numbers
Jack in order customer desires
No. (list personal and dedicated lines last)
Write User's Name for Personal
Check if
Rotary
(Dial
Group
{#607}
for Dedicated Line
Service
(write no.)
{#206}
Pulse)
Line
{#201}
or
Only one of these
{#208}
types per system
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
1.
2.
3.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 2
Form A: System Configuration
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs lnnovations
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.
For additional instructions, see pages 3 and 4.
Auxiliary Equipment (System). Check if applicable:
10.
8. System Settings. Write response on line for each item.
❑ Battery Backup
●
.
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? Write “Yes” or “No”
❑
❑
❑
Caller ID Devices
●
Number of Lines {#104}—By default, 3 lines per PARTNER ACS processor module, 2 lines
per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module are assigned to each extension. Write
Loudspeaker Paging: Number of zones
Magic on Hold (Music on Hold {#602} must be active.)
number if different from default
.
●
Transfer Return Rings {#105}—By default, a transferred call rings 4 times before going
to the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from
❑ Uninterruptible Power Supply
SMDR. If checked, specify the following if appropriate:
❑
default
.
●
SMDR Record Type {#608}—By default, all calls are included on call reports. Write “Out”
if only outgoing calls are reported
●
●
●
Outside Conference Denial {#109}—By default, a conference call can include 2 outside
.
parties. Write “No” if 2 outside parties are not allowed
VMS Cover Rings {#117}—By default, a call rings 3 times before going to the user’s
mailbox. Write number (1-9) if different from default
Ring on Transfer {#119}—By default, the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred.
Write “NA” if Music on Hold or silence is desired
Toll Call Prefix {#402}—By default, 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a
.
●
SMDR Output Format {#610}—By default, up to 15 digits are printed for dialed
numbers in the Number field of the call report. Write “24” if a maximum of 24 digits is
.
desired
.
PARTNER Contact Closure Adjunct. If checked, write in the number (1-4) below to specify
Operation Type for each Contact Closure as appropriate:
❑
.
●
●
long distance call. Write “No” if 0 or 1 is not required
.
OperationType
{#613}
Contact
Closure 1
Contact
Closure 1
System Password {#403}—By default, no password is programmed to override
dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is
1 = 1 second on
2 = 3 seconds on ( ✔ )
3 = 5 seconds on
4 = Toggle
desired
.
●
●
Star Code Dial Delay {#410}—By default, the system inserts a 0 second delay after a valid
Central Office star code when it autodials. Write number (1–5) of seconds if a longer delay
is desired or “NO” if this feature should not be active
Music on Hold {#602}—By default, the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is
active. Write “No” if the jack is deactivated
.
❑
Backup/Restore PC Card. If checked, write “Active” if Automatic System Programming
Backup {#123} is desired
.
.
Line Coverage.
9.
Notes: Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer.
11.
●
VMS Hunt Delay {#506}—By default, VMS answers calls after 2 rings. Write “Del” if calls
ring 4 times before VMS answers
.
●
VMS Hunt Schedule {#507}— By default, VMS is on all the time. Check if Day only or
Night only is desired:
Day only
❑
❑ Night only
Telephone No.
13. Order Nos.
Sales Support Representative’s Name
14.
Installation Date
12.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 3
Form B1: System Extensions
Lucent Technologies
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.
For additional instructions, see page 5.
Bell Labs Innovations
Identify Telephone
Attached to this Extension
Identify Auxiliary Equipment
Attached to this Extension
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write
Transfer
Return
Ext. No.
{#306}
Write in
Other
Equipment
Ext.
Jack
No.
Write Name/Description
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18
19
20
21
22
23
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
24
25
26
27
IMPORTANT: A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typically is the receptionist's extension.
Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typically the System Manager's extension).
6.
Group Assignments, VMS Only.
If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.
Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that
Hotline {#311}.
2.
3.
4.
8.
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines—see
9. Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.
Write “1,” “2,” or “B” (for Both) to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate.
10.
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-
5.
speaker paging system in next column.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 3
Form B1: System Extensions
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.
For additional instructions, see page 5.
ldentify Telephone
Attached to this Extension
Identify Auxiliary Equipment
Attached to this Extension
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write
Transfer
Return
Ext. No.
{#306}
Ext.
Jack
No.
Write in
Other
Equipment
Write Name/Description
28
29
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
30
31
32
33
34
35
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
36
37
38
39
40
41
2. If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form (usually extension 10). Also see Form B2, Identify
Group Assignments, VMS OnIy.
6.
3.
4.
Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that
Hotline {#311}.
8.
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines—see
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.
9.
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-
10.
5.
Write “1,” “2,” or “B” (for Both) to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate.
speaker paging system in next column.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
3 of 3
Form B1: System Extensions
May be used if Ext. Name Display is checked on Form B1,
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Character Codes
Letters:
Ext.
Jack
No.
= 62
N
O
= 21
= 22
= 23
= 31
= 32
= 33
= 41
= 42
= 43
= 51
= 52
= 53
= 61
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed — See Table at Right
= 63
= 71
= 72
= 73
= 74
= 81
= 82
= 83
= 91
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
X = 92
= 93
Z = 94
Y
18
19
20
21
22
23
Numbers:
= 11
blank
= 50
= 60
= 70
5
6
7
= 00
0
1
2
3
4
= 10
= 20
= 30
= 40
24
25
26
27
28
29
8 = 80
= 90
9
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
Note: Only 12 characters display on MLS-model phones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 2
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults.
For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.
Identify
Group Assignments
Identify Extension Settings
if Different than Default
Identify Restrictions/Permissions
If Different than Defaults
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option
If Different than Default
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction
{#302}
Write line numbers in each column to show desired
Line Ringing options
No Restriction
✔
Lines2
Incoming
only
1 – 4
1 – 8 1 – 8
1 – 6
NA
7
1 – 4
Outgoing
only
NA
✔
NR
✔
No Ring
No Access
Immediate
✔
Delayed
Not Assigned
NA
✔
NA
✔
✔
NA
✔
NA
✔
A
✔
A
✔
NA
✔
NA
✔
E
✔
l
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18
19
20
21
22
23
l
l
l
l
l
l
24
25
26
27
Write group number (1–4).
6.
7.
1. Write S for Spanish or F for French.
2. Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines to
extensions.
Assignments
Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,
Write group number (1–6).
=
=
=
=
=
✔
A
E
NA
NR
{CTP}
Default
Assigned or Active
English
Not Assigned or Not Active
No Restriction
8.
9.
Write IN for inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all
3.
outgoing calls on all lines.
{#404}.
4.
Centralized Telephone Programming
=
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 2
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults.
For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.
Identify
Group Assignments
Identify Restrictions/Permissions
If Different than Defaults
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option
If Different than Default
Identify Extension Settings
If Different than Default
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction
{#302}
Write line numbers in each column to show desired
Line Ringing options
No Restriction
✔
7
1 – 6
NA
1 – 4
1 – 8
1 – 4
1 – 8
2
Incoming
only
NA
✔
Lines
Outgoing
only
NR
✔
No Access
NA
✔
✔
NA
✔
No Ring
Delayed
Immediate
✔
Not Assigned
NA
✔
NA
✔
A
✔
A
✔
NA
✔
E
✔
NA
✔
l
l
l
28
29
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
30
31
32
33
34
35
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
36
37
38
39
40
41
Assignments
6.
7.
Write group number (1–4).
Write S for Spanish or F for French.
2. Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines to
extensions.
1.
Default
Assigned or Active
English
Not Assigned or Not Active
No Restriction
✔
A
E
NA
NR
=
=
=
=
=
Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,
Write group number (1–6).
8.
9.
3.
Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all
outgoing calls on all lines.
{#404}.
4.
Centralized Telephone Programming
{CTP} =
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 8
Form C1: PARTNER-34D Phone
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Also write in extension or group number
NightSvc
SAMPLE
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
Template Instructions
OCR
Wake
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
●
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
2
ACE
Music
Account Code Entry (F 12)
Background Music (F 19)2
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4
CF-XX XX
3
Park
1.
Call Park (I XX)
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
Pickup-XX
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
Drop
CC1
Conference Drop (F 06)
extension.
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2
Contact Closure 2 (F 42) 2
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
2. Button with
lights is
CC2
recom-
DLPA
DLPI
ExHold
mended, but
not required.
3. Extension
number can
be pro-
2
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
Fax Management (I XX)
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
I
*7 G)
I
*77 G)
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
LNR
4. You can
program the
origination
extension
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
I
*XX)
only or both
Loudspk
MS-XX
the
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2
origination
5
and
MsgOff-XX
MsgOn-XX
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
destination
extension.
5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Recall 5. You can
Recall (F 03)
program the
SNR
SPage
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21)2
Intercom
Intercom
extension
number.
Ext.
Lock
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button (I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 8
Form C2: Intercom Autodialer
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Make as many copies as you need. Extension 10, Extension 11, or both can
have an Intercom Autodialer. For additional instructions, see page 9.
Template Instructions
●
The numbers in the lower right corner for each button represent
the default extension assignments. If you change them, write in the
new assignments.
SAMPLE
●
If desired, write in Intercom Ring (Ext-XX) or Voice Signal (ExtVS-XX), or
Manual Signal Ring (MS-XX) or Voice Signal (MSVS-XX)
●
If desired, write in user name for this extension
Extensions programmed as shown (circle choices): 10 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
3 of 8
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
Night Service Button {#503}
NightSvc
OCR
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Wake
●
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMS Cover (F 15)
VMSCover
VIOB
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
PARTNER-18D only
2
Account Code Entry (F 12)
ACE
Music
2
Background Music (F 19)
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4
CF-XX XX
Park
3
Call Park (I XX)
1.
2.
3.
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)2
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)2
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
CC1
extension.
Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Extension
number can
be pro-
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
CC2
DLPA
DLPI
ExHold
Fax Management(I XX) 2
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal (I 77 G or
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
I
*7 G)
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
I
*77 G)
4.
You can
program the
origination
extension
only or both
the
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)
I
LNR
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspk
MS-XX
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)2
Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5
origination
and
Intercom
Intercom
MsgOff-XX
destination
extension.
You can
Message Light On (F 09 XX)5
MsgOn-XX
Recall
Ext.
Recall (F 03)
5.
program the
extension
number.
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21) 2
SPage
Lock
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
F =
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
4 of 8
Form C4: PARTNER-6 Phone
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
DND
Priv
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
●
lf desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
Privacy (F 07)
●
VMS Cover (F 15)
VMSCover
VIOB
●
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
1
Account Code Entry (F 12)
Background Music (F 19)1
ACE
Music
1,2
CF-XX XX
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)
Call Park(I XX)3
Park
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
1
CC1
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)1
CC2
DLPA
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
DLPI
ExHold
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
Fax Management (I XX) 1
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or *7 G)
I
Intercom
Intercom
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal (I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
Ext.
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
Intercom Autodial(I XX or
*XX) 1
I
LNR
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspk
MS-XX
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
1
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)
4
MsgOff-XX
MsgOn-XX
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
Message Light On (F 09 XX) 4
Recall
SNR
Recall (F 03)
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
SPage
Station Lock (F 21) 1
Lock
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension
1.
2.
Button with lights is recommended, but not required.
You can program the origination extension only or both the origination
and destination extension.
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
3.
4.
Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button.
You can program the extension number.
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
5 of 8
Form C5: MLS-34D Phone
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
NightSvc
OCR
Night Service Button {#503}
Template Instructions
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114} 1
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Wake
●
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
● If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12) 2
Background Music (F 19)2
ACE
Music
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4
Call Park (I XX) 3
CF-XX XX
Park
Pickup-XX
Drop
1.
2.
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
2
extension.
CC1
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)
Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
2
CC2
DLPA
DLPI
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
3. Extension
number can
be pro-
2
Fax Management (I XX)
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
I
*7 G)
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
You can
program the
origination
extension
only or both
the
origination
and
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
I
*77 G)
4.
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
I
*XX)
Ext.
LNR
Loudspk
MS-XX
Intercom
Intercom
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)2
5
MsgOff-XX
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
destination
extension.
5
MsgOn-XX
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Recall
SNR
Recall (F 03)
5. You can
program the
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
extension
number.
SPage
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
2
Lock
TT-EN
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Station Lock (F 21)
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Voice Mail Message Button (I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
F =
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
6 of 8
Form C6: MLS-18D Phone
Lucent Technologies
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Bell Labs Innovations
Also write in extension or group number
NightSvc
Night Service Button {#503}
SAMPLE
OCR
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114} 1
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
Template Instructions
Wake
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
●
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
ACE
Account Code Entry (F 12) 2
Background Music (F 19) 2
Music
1.
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4
CF-XX XX
Park
3
Call Park (I XX)
extension.
Pickup-XX
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)
2. Button with
Drop
CC1
lights is
Conference Drop (F 06)
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)2
recom-
mended, but
not required.
CC2
2
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)
DLPA
DLPI
3. Extension
number can
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
be pro-
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
grammed as
Auto Dial
button.
2
Fax Management (I XX)
You can
4.
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
I
*7 G)
program the
origination
extension
only or both
the origina-
tion and
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
LNR
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)
I
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Intercom
Intercom
Loudspk
MS-XX
destination
extension.
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
Ext.
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)2
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)5
You can
5.
MsgOff-XX
program the
extension
number.
5
MsgOn-XX
Recall
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Recall (F 03)
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21)2
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
SPage
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Lock
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
F =
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
7 of 8
Form C7: MLS-12/12D Phone
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
Night Service Button {#503}
NightSvc
OCR
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114} 1
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Wake
●
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12)2
ACE
Music
Background Music (F 19)2
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
1.
2.
2,4
CF-XX XX
Park
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)
3
Call Park (I XX)
extension.
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)
Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Conference Drop (F 06)
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)2
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)2
CC1
CC2
DLPA
DLPl
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
3. Extension
number can
be pro-
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
Fax Management(I XX) 2
grammed as
Auto Dial
button.
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or *7 G)
I
4. You can
program the
origination
extension
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal (I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)
I
only or both
the origina-
tion and
destination
extension.
Intercom
Intercom
LNR
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspk
MS-XX
Ext.
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)
Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)5
You can
5.
MsgOff-XX
program the
extension
number.
MsgOn-XX
Recall
Recall (F 03)
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
SPage
2
Lock
Station Lock (F 21)
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
F =
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
8 of 8
Form C8: MLS-6 Phone
Lucent Technologies
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Bell Labs Innovations
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
DND
Priv
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
Template Instructions
Privacy (F 07)
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
●
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
1
ACE
Account Code Entry (F 12)
Background Music (F 19)1
Music
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)1,2
Call Park (I XX )3
CF-XX XX
Park
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)1
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)1
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line (I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
CC1
CC2
DLPA
DLPI
Intercom
Intercom
ExHold
Ext.
1
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
Fax Management (I XX)
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or *7 G)
I
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
LNR
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
1
Intercom Autodial (I XX or
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
I
*XX)
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Loudspk
MS-XX
1
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)
4
MsgOff-XX
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
4
MsgOn-XX
Recall
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Recall (F 03)
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
SPage
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21)1
Lock
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
F =
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension
Button with lights is recommended, but not required.
You can program the origination extension only or both the origination
and destination extension.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button.
You can program the extension number.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 3
Form D: Number Lists
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
For additional instructions, see page 14.
Disallowed Phone Number Lists {#404}
Write the telephone numbers that users are prevented from dialing.
List 4
List 8
List 1
List 5
List 6
List 7
List 3
List 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Telephone Numbe1r Entry
1
Telephone Number
Telephone Number
Entry Telephone Number Entry
Telephone Number Entry Telephone Number
Entry
Telephone Number
Entry
Entry
Telephone Number
Entry
01
02
01
01
02
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
08
09
10
Allowed Phone Number Lists {#407}
Write the telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of assigned restrictions.
List 4
List 5
List 6
List 7
List 8
List 1
List 3
List 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Telephone Number
Entry
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Entry
Telepnone Number
Telephone Number
Telephone Number
Entry
Entry
Entry
Entry
Telephone Number
Telephone Number
Telephone Number
Entry
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Telephone Number
Entry
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Telephone Number can be up to 12 characters, including 0-9, *, and #. Write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).
1.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 3
Form D: Number Lists
Lucent Technologies
Bell labs Innovations
instructions, see page 15.
External Hotline {#311}
Required if External Hotline {#311}
Emergency Phone Number List {#406}
Write Emergency Phone Numbers that can be
dialed from any phone that has access to an
outside line regardless of assigned restrictions.
Person/Place
Write Extension Jack number specified on
Telephone Number1
Entry
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
number to be assigned to Personal Speed Dial
Code 80 for that extension.
Telephone Number2
Ext.Jack
Telephone Number can be up to 12 digits (0-9).
1.
2. Telephone Number can be up to 28 characters, including 0-9, *, #, and special dialing functions.
You can have more than 10 External Hotlines.
NOTE:
An External Hotline phone is a standard phone that dials the
specified telephone number when the handset is lifted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
3 of 3
Form D: Number Lists
Required only if Forced Account Code Verification is desired.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
For additional instructions, see page 15.
Forced Account Code List {#409}
Account Code (up to 6 digits)1
Write Description
Entry
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
1
1
Write Description
Account Code (up to 6 digits)
Entry
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Account Code (up to 6 digits)
Entry
Write Description
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1. Valid entries are 0-9; write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 1
Form E: System Speed Dial Numbers
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Optional for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.
For additional instructions, see page 16.
To Dial: On system phones, press [ Feature ] + 3-digit code. On standard phones, press [
#
] + 3-digit code while receiving intercom dial tone.
1
Code
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
Name/Company
Telephone Number2
Name/Company
Telephone Number2
Code
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
Telephone Number2
1
1
★
Name/Company
★
Code
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
★
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
2 Telephone number can be up to 28 digits, including 0-9, ★ ,
(see page 16 of instructions for detailed information).
#
and special dialing functions
1 You can dial System Speed Dial numbers that are marked with ★ at any time, regardless of
dialing restrictions placed on your extension. System Speed Dial numbers are programmed by the
System Manager (report problems and suggested revisions to your System Manager).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 3
Form A: System Configuration
Lucent Technologies
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.
For additional instructions, see page 2.
Bell Labs Innovations
6.
Configure Hardware for Hybrid Mode (PARTNER II system only):
Customer Billing Name
1.
No ❑
Yes ❑ If yes, call local telephone company—
MF Mode and FCC # AS5 USA-21312-MF-E
2. Installation Address
3. Contact Name
Features Customer is most interested in (most important first):
7.
Phone
(
)
–
–
Phone
Alternate Trainee’s Name
Phone
Person to be Trained
4.
5.
(
)
(
)
–
Phone
Salesperson’s Name
Lucent Technologies Sales Force
Sold by
[ ]
[ ]
(
)
–
Dealer:
8.
System Lines
Line Coverage—You can select one per line
Hybrid Mode
Only:
Write
R if
Rotary
(Dial
l
l
l
l
l
1
Write7
Ext. No
for Call
Cover
3
VMS-
AA
VMS-6
Mail
{#206}
or
4
5
2
l
l
l
ASA
Identify other Local
Telephone Company
Subscription Services
(e.g., Repeat Call)
Hunt
Group
Write User’s Name for
Check
AA
DXD
Line Write the Telephone
Personal or Owned Line if
Numbers in order
Jack
No.
Write auxiliary
{#607} ll {#205} l
{#204}
Caller
{#206}
or Identify Equipment for
Dedicated Line
customer desires
(list personal and
dedicated lines last)
(Write no.)
l
Pulse) pool 881, 882,
ID
{#206}
883 or No Pool
{#207}
Line
{#201}
Only one of these
Service
{#208}
types per system
{#208}
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
l
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
column.
1.
2.
3.
6.
MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS column.
Write extension number of line owner eligible for Call Coverage. Also write line owner’s name in next
7.
column.
4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 3
Form A: System Configuration
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.
For additional instructions, see page 3.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
If VMS-AA is checked, specify the following:
VMS-AA:
System Settings. Write response on line for each item.
9.
VMS Hunt Delay {#506}—By default, VMS answers calls after 2 rings. Write “Del” if
●
.
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? Write “Yes” or “No”
.
calls ring 4 times before VMS answers
●
Number of Lines {#104}—By default, 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module
are assigned to each extension (or to pool 880 in PARTNER II Hybrid Mode). Write
VMS Hunt Schedule {#507}—By default, VMS is on all the time. Check if Day only or
Night only is desired:
.
number if different from default
❑
Day only
Night only
●
Transfer Return Rings {#105}—By default, a transferred call rings 4 times before going to
the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from
❑
ASA: (PARTNER II system only) If ASA is checked, specify the following:
default
.
Automatic System Answer Delay {#110}—By default, a call rings 2 times before it is
●
●
●
●
●
●
Outside Conference Denial {#109}—By default, a conference call can include 2 outside
parties. Write “No” if 2 outside parties are not allowed
.
answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default
.
Automatic System Answer Mode {#121}—By default, ASA calls are put on hold after the
greeting plays. Check if calls should continue to ring or be disconnected:
Call Coverage Rings {#116} (PARTNER II only)—By default, a covered call rings 2 times
before going to the covering extention. Write number (1-9) if different from default
.
❑
❑
Ring
Disconnect
VMS Cover Rings {#117}—By default, a call rings 3 times before going to the user’s
.
mailbox. Write number (1-9) if different from default
ASA Record/Playback (I 891)—message of up to 10 seconds that caller hears
when the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature. Write
message below and record from extension 10 or 11:
Ring on Transfer {#119}—By default, the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred.
.
Write “NA” if music on hold or silence is desired
Toll Call Prefix {#402}—By default, 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a
.
long distance call. Write “No” if 0 or 1 is not required
System Password {#403}—By default, no password is programmed to override dialing
restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is
desired
.
●
Music on Hold {#602}—By default, the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is
active. Write “No” if the jack is deactivated
.
10.
DXD: (PARTNER II system only) If DXD is checked, specify the following:
Direct Extension Dial Delay {#112}—By default, a call rings 2 times before it is
.
answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default
Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback (I 892)—message of up to 20 seconds that
caller hears when call is answered with the Direct Extension Dial feature. Write
message below and record from extension 10 or 11:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
3 of 3
Form A: System Configuration
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.
For additional instructions, see page 4.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Auxiliary Equipment (System). Check if applicable:
11.
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
Battery Backup
Caller ID Devices
Loudspeaker Paging: Number of zones
Magic on Hold (Music on Hold {#602} must be active.)
Uninterruptible Power Supply
SMDR If checked, specify the following if appropriate:
●
SMDR Record Type (#608)—By default, all calls are included on call reports. Write
.
“Out” if only outgoing calls are reported
●
●
SMDR Output Format (#610)—By default, up to 15 digits are printed for dialed
numbers in the Number field of the call report. Write “24” if a maximum of 24 digits
.
is desired
SMDR Talk Time (#611) (PARTNER II only)—By default, a Talk field is not included
.
on the call report. Write “Active” if the Talk field is desired
Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer.
12. Notes:
Telephone No.
Order Nos.
14.
15. Sales Support Representative’s Name
13.
Installation Date
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 4
Form B1: System Extensions
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.
For-additional instructions, see page 5.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Auxiliary Equipment
Attached to this Extension
Identify Telephone
Attached to this Extension
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write
Transfer
Return
Ext. No.
{#306}
Write in
Other
Equipment
Ext.
Jack
No.
Write Name/Description
10
11
12
13
14
15
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
16
17
18
19
20
21
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
22
23
24
25
26
27
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
28
29
30
31
32
33
IMPORTANT:
A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typically is the receptionist's extension.
Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typically the System Manager's extension).
Group Assignments, VMS Only.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.
Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.
Must be standard phone. If immedate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that
Hotline {#311}.
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines-see
7.
8.
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.
9.
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-
5.
speaker paging system in next column.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 4
Form B1: System Extensions
Required for PARTNER II System extensions 34 through 57.
For additional instructions, see page 5.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Auxiliary Equipment
Attached to this Extension
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Telephone
Attached to this Extension
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write
Transfer
Return
Ext. No.
{#306}
Write in
Other
Equipment
Ext.
Jack
No.
Write Name/Description
34
35
36
37
38
39
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40
41
42
43
44
45
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
46
47
48
49
50
51
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
52
53
54
55
56
57
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Group Assignments, VMS Only.
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines-see
6.
2. If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.
7.
8.
3. Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.
4.
5.
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that
Hotline {#311}.
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-
speaker paging system in next column.
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.
9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
3 of 4
Form B1: System Extensions
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Character Codes
Letters:
= 62
0 = 63
N
= 21
B = 22
Ext.
Jack
No.
A
Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed – See Table at Right
P
Q
R
S
= 71
= 72
= 73
= 74
= 23
= 31
= 32
= 33
= 41
= 42
= 43
= 51
= 52
= 53
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
10
11
12
13
14
15
T = 81
U
V
W
= 82
= 83
= 91
16
17
18
19
20
21
X = 92
Y
Z
= 93
= 94
M = 61
Numbers:
= 11
blank
5
6
7
8
9
= 50
= 60
= 70
= 80
= 90
= 00
= 10
= 20
= 30
= 40
0
1
2
3
4
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Note:
Only 12 characters display on MLS-model phones.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
4 of 4
Form B1: System Extensions
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Character Codes
Letters:
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
= 62
= 63
= 71
= 72
= 73
= 74
= 81
= 82
= 83
= 91
Ext.
Jack
No.
= 21
= 22
= 23
= 31
= 32
= 33
= 41
A
B
C
D
E
F
Write 2-Digit Code for Each Character To Be Displayed — See Table at Right
34
35
36
37
38
39
G
H = 42
= 43
= 51
= 52
= 53
= 61
I
J
K
L
M
40
41
42
43
44
45
= 92
= 93
= 94
Y
Z
Numbers:
= 11
blank
= 50
= 60
= 70
= 80
= 90
5
6
7
8
9
= 00
= 10
= 20
= 30
= 40
0
1
2
3
4
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
Only 12 characters display on MLS-model phones.
Note:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 2
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults for PARTNER II System
and PARTNER Plus System. For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Identify
Group Assignments
Identify Restrictions/Permissions
If Different than Defaults
Identify Extension Settings
if Different than Default
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option
If Different than Default
l
l
Hybrid Mode
Only:
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers or pool access codes
for Line Access Restriction {#302} or
Pool Access Restriction {#315}
Write line numbers or pool access codes in each
column to show desired Line Ringing options
No Restriction
✔
No Ring
pools
Lines/Pools3
Not Assigned
1 – 4 1 – 4
1 – 4
1 – 6
NA
7
1 – 4
Incoming
only
Immediate
lines
Outgoing
only
NR
✔
No Access
NA
✔
Delayed
NA
✔
✔
✔
NA
✔
A
✔
✔
NA
✔
NA
✔
P
✔
NA
✔
E
✔
NA
✔
A
✔
NA
✔
l
ALL
K
10
11
12
13
14
15
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
16
17
18
19
20
21
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
22
23
24
25
26
27
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
28
29
30
31
32
33
Write group number (1–4).
Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,
Write group number (1–6).
5.
6.
7.
Assignments
Write S for Spanish or F for French.
In Hybrid Mode only, write K for Key extension. Extension 10 always operates
as a Key extension.
In Key Mode, use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines
to extensions. In Hybrid Mode, use Pool Extension Assignment {#314} to
remove pools from or assign pools to extensions.
Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all
outgoing calls on all lines.
1.
2.
✔
=
Default
Assigned or Active
A
=
E
=
=
=
=
English
Not Assigned or Not Active
No Restriction
8.
3.
4.
NA
NR
P
9.
Pooled
{CTP} = Centralized Telephone Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
Form B2: Customized Extension Setting
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults for PARTNER II System
extensions 34 through 57. For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.
2 of 2
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option
Identify Restrictions/Permissions
Identify Extension Settings
if Different than Default
Identify
Group Assignments
If Different than Default
If Different than Defaults
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Hybrid Mode
Only:
Write line numbers or pool access codes
for Line Access Restriction {#302} or
Pool Access Restriction {#315}
Write line numbers or pool access codes in each
column to show desired Line Ringing options
No Restriction
✔
Lines/Pools3
Not Assigned
1–4
NA
7
1–4
1 – 6
l
Incoming
only
1–4
1 – 4
Outgoing
only
No Ring
pools
NR
✔
No Access
NA
✔
Immediate
lines
Delayed
✔
✔
NA
✔
NA
✔
A
✔
NA
✔
NA
✔
P
✔
E
✔
NA
✔
✔
NA ✔
NA ✔
A
✔
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
34
35
36
37
38
39
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
40
41
42
43
44
45
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
46
47
48
49
50
51
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
52
53
54
55
56
57
Assignments
Write group number (1–4).
Write group number (1–4), If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,
Write group number (1–6).
5.
6.
7.
Default
Assigned or Active
English
1. Write S for Spanish or F for French.
2. In Hybrid Mode only, write K for Key extension.
3.
✔
A
E
=
=
=
=
=
=
In Key Mode, use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines
to extensions. In Hybrid Mode, use Pool Extension Assignment {#314} to
remove pools from or assign pools to extensions.
Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all
outgoing calls on all lines.
8.
Not Assigned or Not Active
No Restriction
NA
NR
P
9.
10.
Pooled
4.
{CTP} = Centralized Telephone Programming
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 8
Form C1: PARTNER-34D Phone
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist. For additional
instructions, see page 8.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
●
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
NightSvc
OCR
●
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction
Wake
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
Privacy (F 07)
Priv
VMS Cover (F 15)
VMSCover
VIOB
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
2
Account Code Entry (F 12)
Background Music (F 19)2
ACE
Music
PARTNER
II system
only.
1.
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58)2
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4
Backup
CF-XX XX
Park
2. Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
extension.
3. Button with
lights is
4
Call Park (I XX)
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)
Pickup-XX
Conference Drop (F 06)
Drop
CC1
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
DLPA
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Extension
number can
be pro-
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
DLPI
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
LNR
4.
Fax Management(I XX) 2
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or *7 G)
I
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
5. You can
program the
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
I
*XX)
origination
extension
only or both
the
origination
and
Loudspk
MS-XX
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)5
Recall (F 03)
MsgOff-XX
Intercom
Intercom
destination
extension.
MsgOn-XX
Recall
Ext.
6. You can
program the
extension
number.
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21) 2
SPage
Lock
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two
buttons are associated with this pool.
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 8
Form C2: Intercom Autodialer
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
For additional instructions,
see page 9.
PARTNER II only
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
●
If desired, write in Intercom Ring (Ext-XX) or Voice Signal (ExtVS-XX),
or Manual Signal Ring (MS-XX) or Voice Signal (MSVS-XX)
●
If desired, write in user name for this extension
Extensions programmed as shown (circle choices): 10 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
3 of 8
Form C3: PARTNER-18 Phone
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see page 8.
Check Desired Features
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
NightSvc
●
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number
1
●
OCR
Wake
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
PARTNER-18D only
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12)2
Background Music (F 19)2
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58) 2
ACE
Music
1.
2.
PARTNER
II system
only.
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
extension.
Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Extension
number can
be pro-
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
Backup
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4
Call Park(I XX) 4
CF-XX XX
Park
Pickup-XX
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)
Drop
CC1
Conference Drop (F 06)
3.
4.
Contact Closure 1 (F 41 ) 2
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
DLPA
DLPI
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
LNR
Fax Management(I XX) 2
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
I
* 7 G)
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
5. You can
program the
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)
I
origination
extension
only or both
the
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspk
MS-XX
Intercom
Intercom
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)
origination
Ext.
5
MsgOff-XX
and
destination
extension.
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
5
MsgOn-XX
Recall
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Recall (F 03)
6. You can
program the
extension
number.
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two
buttons are associated with this pool.
SPage
Lock
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21) 2
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
F =
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
4 of 8
Form C4: PARTNER-6 Phone
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see page 8.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
DND
Priv
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
Privacy (F 07)
●
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number
●
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
1
ACE
Account Code Entry (F 12)
Background Music (F 19)1
Music
✔
1,2,3
Cover-XX XX
Call Coverage (F 20 XX XX)
✔
1,3
CF-XX XX
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)
Call Park (I XX )4
Park
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
DLPA
DLPI
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
1
Fax Management (I XX)
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
I
*7 G)
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
Intercom
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
Intercom
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
Ext.
1
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)
I
LNR
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspk
MS-XX
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)1
Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two
buttons are associated with this pool.
MsgOff-XX
MsgOn-XX
Recall
5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Recall (F 03)
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
SPage
Lock
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21) 1
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
F =
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension
1. Button with lights is recommended, but not required.
2. PARTNER II system only.
3. You can program the origination extension only or both the origination
and destination extension.
4. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button.
5. You can program the extension number.
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
Form C5: MLS-34D Phone
5 of 8
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist. For additional
instructions, see page 8.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
●
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
NightSvc
●
1
OCR
Wake
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
DND
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12)2
Background Music (F 19)2
ACE
Music
1.
PARTNER
II system
only.
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58)2
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4
Call Park(I XX) 4
Backup
CF-XX XX
2. Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
Park
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
extension.
Conference Drop (F 06)
3. Button with
lights is
Contact Closure 1 (F 41 )2
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
CC1
DLPA
DLPI
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Extension
number can
be pro-
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
4.
5.
2
Fax Management (I XX)
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
I
*7 G)
Ext.
I
*77 G)
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
You can
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
I
*XX)
program the
origination
extension
only or both
the
Intercom
Intercom
LNR
Loudspk
MS-XX
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2
origination
and
destination
extension.
5
MsgOff-XX
MsgOn-XX
Recall
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two
buttons are associated with this pool.
Recall (F 03)
6. You can
SNR
program the
extension
number.
Save Number Redial (F 04)
SPage
SimultaneousPaging(I * 70)
2
Lock
TT-EN
Station Lock (F 21)
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
VMMsgs-777
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
VMBox
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
F =
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
6 of 8
Form C6: MLS-18 Phone
Lucent Technologies
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see page 8.
Bell Labs Innovations
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
NightSvc
OCR
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
●
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number
1
●
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction
Wake
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
2
ACE
Account Code Entry (F 12)
Background Music (F 19) 2
Music
1.
2.
PARTNER
II system
only.
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58)2
Backup
2,4
CF-XX XX
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
4
Park
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Park (I XX)
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)
extension.
Conference Drop (F 06)
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2
Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
3.
CC1
DLPA
DLPI
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
ExHold
4. Extension
number can
be pro-
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
2
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Fax Management (I XX)
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
I
*7 G)
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
Intercom
Intercom
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
5. You can
program the
origination
extension
only or both
the
2
Ext.
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)
I
LNR
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspk
MS-XX
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)2
Message Light Off (F 10 XX) 5
Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5
Recall (F 03)
origination
and
destination
extension.
MsgOff-XX
MsgOn-XX
Recall
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, it pool 880 is assigned, these two
buttons are associated with this pool.
6.
You can
program the
extension
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
SPage
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21)2
number.
Lock
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
TT-EN
VMMsgs-777
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
VMBox
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
7 of 8
Form C7: MLS-12 Phone
Lucent Technologies
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see page 8.
Check Desired Features
Bell Labs Innovations
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
NightSvc
OCR
Night Service Button {#503}
●
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number
1
●
●
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction
Wake
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
2
ACE
Account Code Entry (F 12)
Background Music (F 19) 2
Music
1.
PARTNER
II system
only.
2
Backup
Backup Failure Alarm (F 58)
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4
CF-XX XX
2. Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
Call Park(I XX) 4
Park
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
extension.
Button with
lights is
Conference Drop (F 06)
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)
3.
2
CC1
DLPA
DLPI
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Extension
number can
be pro-
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
ExHold
4.
2
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Fax Management (I XX)
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
I
*7 G)
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
I
*77 G)
Intercom
Intercom
5.
You can
program the
origination
extension
only or both
the
Intercom Autodial(I XX or
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging (I 70)
I
*XX) 2
Ext.
LNR
Loudspk
MS-XX
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2
origination
and
5
MsgOff-XX
MsgOn-XX
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
destination
extension.
You can
program the
extension
number.
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two
buttons are associated with this pool.
5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
6.
Recall (F 03)
Recall
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
SPage
2
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Lock
TT-EN
Station Lock (F 21)
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
8 of 8
Form C8: MLS-6 Phone
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see page 8.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovation
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
SAMPLE
Template Instructions
DND
Priv
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
Privacy (F 07)
●
If desired, write in line number, pool access code, dial code feature, or auto dial number
●
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction or Pool Access Restriction
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
1
ACE
Account Code Entry (F 12)
1
Music
Background Music (F 19)
✔
1,2,3
Cover-XX XX
CF-XX XX
Call Coverage (F 20 XX XX)
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)1,3
✔
Call Park (I XX )4
Park
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
DLPA
DLPI
Intercom
Intercom
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
1
Ext.
Fax Management (I XX)
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
I
*7 G)
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
* For PARTNER II systems in Hybrid mode only, if pool 880 is assigned, these two
buttons are associated with this pool.
1
Intercom Autodial (I XX or *XX)
I
LNR
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspk
MS-XX
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)1
5
MsgOff-XX
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
5
MsgOn-XX
Recall
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Recall (F 03)
SNR
Save Number Redial (F 04)
SPage
Lock
Simultaneous Paging (I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21) 1
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button L = Line XX = Extension
F =
1. Button with lights is recommended, but not required.
2. PARTNER II system only.
3.
You can program the origination extension only or both the origination
and destination extension.
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
4. Extension number can be programmed as Auto Dial button.
5. You can program the extension number.
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 2
Form D: Number Lists
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
identifies Disallowed or Allowed List Assignments. For additional instructions,
see pages 14 and 15.
Emergency Phone Number List {#406}
Write Emergency Phone Numbers that can be
dialed from any phone that has access to an
outside line regardless of assigned restrictions.
Disallowed Phone Number Lists {#404}
Write the telephone numbers that users are prevented from dialing.
List 2
2
Person/Place
List 1
List 3
List 4
Telephone Number
Entry
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Telephone Number1
Telephone Number1
Telephone NUmber1
Telephone Number1
Entry
Entry
Entry
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Entry
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
External Hotline {#311}
Required if External Hotline {#311}
Allowed Phone Number Lists {#407}
Write the telephone numbers that users can dial regardless of assigned restrictions.
Write Extension Jack number specified on
number to be assigned to Personal Speed Dial
Code 80 for that extension.
List 1
List 3
List 4
List 2
1
1
1
Telephone Number1
Telephone Number
Entry
Telephone Number Entry
Telephone Number
Entry
Entry
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
3
Telephone Number
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Ext.Jack
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Telephone Number can be up to 12 characters, including 0-9, *, and #. Write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).
Telephone Number can be up to 12 digits (0-9).
3. Telephone Number can be up to 28 characters, including 0-9, *, #, and special dialing functions. You can have more
than 10 External Hotlines.
1.
2.
An External Hotline phone is a phone that dials the specified
telephone number when the handset is lifted.
NOTE:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 2
Form D: Number Lists
Required only if Forced Account Code Verification is desired.
For additional instructions, see page 15.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Forced Account Code List {#409}
Account Code (up to 6 digits)1
Write Description
1
1
Entry
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
Write Description
Account Code (up to 6 digits)
Account Code (up tp 6 digits)
Entry
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Entry
Write Description
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
1. Valid entries are 0-9; write ! for wildcard (press Hold to program).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 1
Form E: System Speed Dial Number
Optional for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.
For additional instructions, see page 16.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
To Dial: On system phones, press [ Feat ] + 3-digit code. On standard phones, press [
#
] + 3-digit code while receiving intercom dial tone.
1
Telephone Number2
1
1
Telephone Number2
Code
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
Name/Company
★
Telephone Number2
★
★
Code
6 3 4
6 3 5
6 3 6
Name/Company
Name/Company
Code
6 0 0
6 0 1
6 0 2
6 0 3
6 0 4
6 0 5
606
6 0 7
6 0 8
6 0 9
6 1 0
6 1 1
6 1 2
6 1 3
6 1 4
6 1 5
6 1 6
6 1 7
6 1 8
6 1 9
6 2 0
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
6 3 7
6 3 8
6 3 9
6 4 0
6 4 1
642
6 4 3
6 4 4
6 4 5
6 4 6
6 4 7
6 4 8
6 4 9
6 5 0
6 5 1
6 5 2
6 5 3
6 5 4
6 5 5
6 5 6
6 5 7
6 5 8
6 5 9
6 6 0
6 6 1
6 6 2
6 6 3
6 6 4
6 6 5
666
1
2
Telephone number can be up to 28 digits, including 0-9, ★ , #
and special dialing functions (see page 16 of instructions for
detailed information).
You can dial System Speed Dial numbers that are marked
with ★ at any time, regardless of dialing restrictions placed on
your extension. System Speed Dial numbers are programmed
by the System Manager (report problems and suggested
revisions to your System Manager).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
F
Purpose
This appendix contains two case studies based on actual customer
requirements. Each case study defines the call handling requirements of the
business and explains how the planning forms for the communications system
and voice messaging system were filled out. You can use these case studies to
determine how customer requirements were matched to PARTNER MAIL VS
system features.
F-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
Case Study #1
About the Customer
Tennis Land is a sports center that offers tennis enthusiasts six tennis courts
and a large, well-stocked shop for purchasing a variety of tennis paraphernalia
including racquets and tennis wear. In addition, Tennis Land offers lessons and
clinics from staff coaches. When the coaches are not giving lessons or clinics,
hosting tournaments, or traveling with the Tennis Land team in exhibition
matches, they help the sales people in the shop. Stan Williams—the owner,
Sally Parker—the manager, and the coaches all have private offices.
Stan purchased a PARTNER Advanced Communications System Release 1.0
and a PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 Voice Messaging System. He believes that
the systems’ features will help his employees provide better service to
customers.
Sally is responsible for managing the systems; she established these facts:
■
The system will have three outside lines and 8 extensions.
■
The clerk will have a PARTNER-18D phone at extension 10. Sally’s
PARTNER-18D phone will be extension 11. Stans’ PARTNER-18D phone
will be extension 12. The three coaches will have PARTNER-18 phones.
Two MLS-12 phones will be in the shop.
■
Stan’s callers should be able to reach him without having to be
transferred by an employee or the PARTNER MAIL VS system, so Stan
will have a personal line. When Stan is not available, his callers will be
sent directly to his mailbox where they can leave messages.
■
Stan prefers that customers speak with an employee while the center is
open, so all lines will ring at all phones. Although there is no receptionist,
the clerk and the salespeople will serve the receptionist function by
answering calls when they can.
■
During business hours, calls will go to the Automated Attendant Service
of the PARTNER MAIL VS system only when the clerk and salespeople
are busy.
■
All of Tennis Land’s customers and employees speak English, so the
PARTNER MAIL VS system will be set for Monolingual Mode with U.S.
English as the System Language.
■
Potential customers call frequently to inquire about Tennis Land’s hours
and location, as well as tournament and exhibition match schedules.
Therefore, when the Automated Attendant Service answers, callers can
choose to hear either an announcement that includes Tennis Land’s
hours of operation and directions to the center or another detailing
current and upcoming competitions.
■
Callers who receive Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to a
salesperson will be able to reach the first available person in the shop.
F-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
■
The mailbox at extension 10 will be used for general messages.
Customers who receive Automated Attendant Service and stay on the
line or press 0 for assistance will be routed to this extension, which is at
the clerk’s desk. Customers who call after business hours will have the
option of leaving a message in this mailbox.
■
■
Stan, Sally, and each coach will have a mailbox and Automatic VMS
Cover. Callers will be routed automatically to the appropriate mailbox
where they can leave a message when the person they called is not
available.
Stan, Sally, and each coach will also have Outcalling privileges so that
when they are moving around the club during tournaments or traveling
with the team, they can be alerted via their pagers to the arrival of
messages being left in their voice mailboxes.
Stan especially wants customers to be able to leave messages for the
coaches when they are away from their offices. This capability will help
prevent missed appointments and lost income when customers call
about lessons and clinics.
F-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
Filling Out the Planning Forms
This section explains how the System Planner for the PARTNER Advanced
Communications System Release 1.0 and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS
Release 4 Voice Messaging System are filled out based on the facts in the
Tennis Land case. For brevity, “CS” refers to the System Planner forms for the
communications system and “VMS” refers to the forms for the voice messaging
system.
■
■
Write the Telephone Numbers in order customer desires: Telephone
numbers in this column represent Tennis Land’s three lines. The last line,
Line 03, is Stan’s personal line.
VMS-AA: In this column, checks for Lines 01, 02, and 03 indicate that
unanswered calls on those lines go to the Automated Attendant Service
of the PARTNER MAIL VS system.
■
VMS-Mail: Stan’s extension number, 12, in this column indicates that
the Line Coverage Extension (#208) feature sends unanswered calls on
Line 04 directly to Stan’s mailbox.
System Settings:
■
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? The clerk and
salespeople will serve the receptionist function; so “Yes” appears on
this line.
■
■
Ring on Transfer (#119): “NA” written in the space provided indicates
that music or recorded messages will be played while calls are being
transferred.
Music on Hold (#602): The blank line indicates that a Music on Hold
device is installed.
Line Coverage:
■
VMS Hunt Delay (#506): “Del” (Delayed) indicates that the Automated
Attendant Service acts as a backup, picking up calls after the fourth ring.
A person has a chance to answer before a call goes to the PARTNER
MAIL VS system.
■
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507): The absence of any check mark indicates
that the Automated Attendant Service picks up unanswered calls during
business hours and after hours. (This setting is the default.)
F-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
■
Write Name/Description: The names listed for extensions 10 though 19
in this column identify the extension assignments.
■
■
Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension: Check in these
columns specify the type of telephone each person or location has.
VMS in the Write Name/Description column and checks in the
PARTNER MAIL VS column indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS module
is installed in Slot 3 of the Control Unit. The module uses extensions 22
and 23, the last two extensions for that slot.
■
Write Transfer Return Ext. No.: “10” in this column indicates that
when a call transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered,
it goes to extension 10 where the clerk can answer it.
■
Automatic VMS Cover (#310): Check in this column indicate that
unanswered calls to extensions 10 through 15 automatically are covered
by the Automated Attendant Service.
■
Hunt Group Extensions 1-6 (#505): “1” in this column indicates that
extensions 16 and 17 make up Hunt Group 1. A call transferred to this
group rings three times at the first non-busy extension. If it is not
answered, it moves to the next non-busy extensions in the group,
continuing until someone answers or the caller hangs up.
■
Hunt Group Extensions VMS Only: column for extensions 22
and 23 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by the
PARTNER MAIL VS module be assigned to Hunt Group 7.
■
PARTNER-18D phone at extension 10: Night Service, Do Not Disturb,
Voice Mail Messages, and Voice Mailbox Transfer.
The Night Service button allows the user to turn Night Service on and off.
When Night Service is off, the Day Menu prompt plays. When Night
Service is on, the Night Menu Prompt plays.
A subscriber can use the Do Not Disturb button to send callers to the
general mailbox without ringing the extension first.
The Voice Mail Messages button allows the user to call Voice Mail
Service with one touch.
The Voice Mailbox Transfer button allows the user to transfer callers
directly to another subscriber’s mailbox without ringing the extension first.
■
PARTNER-18 phones at extensions 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15:
Do Not Disturb, Voice Mail Messages, and Voice Mailbox Transfer.
F-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
■
on the MLS-12 phones at extensions 16 and 17.
VMS Form 1
■
The default settings for Language Mode (Monolingual) and System
Language (U.S. English) are used.
■
Subscriber Name: In this column, the names assigned to mailboxes 10
though 15 indicate that the clerk, Sally, Stan, and the coaches have
mailboxes.
■
■
Mailboxes 16 through 19 are marked for deletion. For system security,
it is advisable to delete unused mailboxes.
Outcalling Assigned: “Yes” in this column indicates that Outcalling
privileges are assigned to Sally, Stan, and the coaches.
■
■
Description: In this column, “Direct Extension Transfer” for Selector
Code 1 indicates that when callers get the Automated Attendant Service,
they can transfer to any extension (10 to 19) by entering the extension
number.
“Shop” in the Description column and “771” in the Specific Ext. # or
Group # for Selector Code Transfer, or Announcement # column for
Selector Code 4 indicate that when callers get the Automated Attendant
Service, they can press 4 to transfer to Hunt Group 1 (which is defined
■
“Announcement” in the Description column and the numbers (1 and 2)
in the Specific Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer, or
Announcement # column indicate that when callers get the Automated
Attendant Service they can choose to hear one of two Announcements.
■
When an unanswered call goes to the Automated Attendant Service and
the caller chooses to hear an Announcement, the caller hears one of the
■
When Night Service is off and an unanswered call goes to the Automated
F-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
■
When Night Service is on and an unanswered call goes to the Automated
Post-Installation Recommendations
■
Stan, Sally, and the coaches should record a personal greeting and
change the factory set password for their mailboxes.
■
■
Stan, Sally, and the coaches should turn on Outcalling and enter an
Outcalling number and schedule.
The clerk should record a general business greeting for the mailbox at
extension 10 and change the factory-set password for that mailbox.
F-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
F-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 2
System Configuration
Form A:
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.
For additional instructions, see page 2.
1.
Customer Billing Name
6. Features Customer is most interested in (most important first):
2. Installation Address
Phone
Phone
3.
4.
Contact Name
Phone
Person to be Trained
Alternate Trainee’s Name
(
)
–
❑
❑
5.Sold by
Lucent Technologies Sales Force
Dealer:
Salesperson’s Name
Phone
7.
System Lines
Line Coverage—You can select one per line
Write
R if
1l
l
l
l
4
2
3
VMS-
Mail
{#206}
VMS-
AA
{#206}
A A
Hunt
Group
Line Write the Telephone Numbers
Jack in order customer desires
Identify other Local Telephone
Caller ID Company Subscription Services
(e.g., Repeat Call)
Service
Write User’s Name for Personal
or Owned Line or Identify Equipment
for Dedicated Line
Check if
Rotary
(Dial
No.
(list personal and dedicated lines last)
{#607}
(write no.)
{#206}
Pulse)
Line
{#201}
or
Only one of these
{#208}
types per system
✔
✔
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
1.
2.
3.
4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 2
System Configuration
Form A:
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.
For additional instructions, see pages 3 and 4.
10.
Auxiliary Equipment (System). Check if applicable:
8.
System Settings. Write response on line for each item.
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
Battery Backup
.
●
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? Write “Yes” or “No”
Caller ID Devices
●
Number of Lines {#104}—By default, 3 lines per PARTNER ACS processor module, 2 lines
per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module are assigned to each extension. Write
Loudspeaker Paging: Number of zones
Magic on Hold (Music on Hold {#602} must be active.)
Uninterruptible Power Supply
number if different from default
.
●
Transfer Return Rings {#105}—By default, a transferred call rings 4 times before going
to the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from
SMDR. If checked, specify the following if appropriate:
default
.
●
SMDR Record Type {#608}—By default, all calls are included on call reports. Write “Out”
●
●
●
Outside Conference Denial {#109}—By default, a conference call can include 2 outside
.
if only outgoing calls are reported
parties. Write “No” if 2 outside parties are not allowed
.
●
SMDR Output Format {#610}—By default, up to 15 digits are printed for dialed
numbers in the Number field of the call report. Write “24” if a maximum of 24 digits is
VMS Cover Rings {#117}—By default, a call rings 3 times before going to the user’s
.
mailbox. Write number (1-9) if different from default
Ring on Transfer {#119}—By default, the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred.
Write “NA” if Music on Hold or silence is desired
Toll Call Prefix {#402}—By default, 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a
.
desired
❑ PARTNER Contact Closure Adjunct. If checked, write in the number (1-4) below to specify
.
Operation Type for each Contact Closure as appropriate:
●
●
.
long distance call. Write “No” if 0 or 1 is not required
OperationType
{#613}
Contact
Closure 1
Contact
Closure 1
System Password {#403}—By default, no password is programmed to override
dialing restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is
1 = 1 second on
2 = 3 seconds on ( ✔ )
3 = 5 seconds on
4 = Toggle
desired
.
●
●
Star Code Dial Delay {#410}—By default, the system inserts a 0 second delay after a valid
Central Office star code when it autodials. Write number (1–5) of seconds if a longer delay
.
is desired or “NO” if this feature should not be active
Music on Hold {#602}—By default, the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is
❑ Backup/Restore PC Card. If checked, write “Active” if Automatic System Programming
.
active. Write “No” if the jack is deactivated
9. Line Coverage.
.
Backup {#123} is desired
11. Notes: Write any additional information that you want to communicate to the installer.
●
VMS Hunt Delay {#506}—By default, VMS answers calls after 2 rings. Write “Del” if calls
ring 4 times before VMS answers
.
●
VMS Hunt Schedule {#507}—By default, VMS is on all the time. Check if Day only or
Night only is desired:
❑
❑
Day only
Night only
12.
Installation Date
13.
Order Nos.
Telephone No.
14.
Sales Support Representative’s Name
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 3
System Extensions
Form B1:
Lucent Technologies
Required for PARTNER Advanced Communications System.
For additional instructions, see page 5.
Bell Labs Innovations
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Telephone
Identify Auxiliary Equipment
Attached to this Extension
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Attached to this Extension
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write
Transfer
Return
Ext. No.
{#306}
Write in
Other
Equipment
Ext.
Jack
No.
Write Name/Description
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
10
11
12
13
14
15
✔
✔
16
17
18
19
20
21
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
✔
✔
10
10
22
23
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
24
25
26
27
IMPORTANT:
A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typically is the receptionist’s extension.
Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typically the System Manager’s extension).
Group Assignments, VMS Only.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If checked, see Form B1, Page 3 of 3.
If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.
Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call waiting is desired, check next column.
7.
8. Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines—see
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that
prevent dialing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Also see Form D, External
Hotline {#311}.
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loud-
9.
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.
10. Write “1,” “2,” or “B” (for Both) to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate.
5.
speaker paging system in next column.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 2
Form B2:
Customized Extension Settings
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults.
For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.
Identify
Group Assignments
Identify Restrictions/Permissions
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option
Identify Extension Settings
if Different than Default
If Different than Defaults
If Different than Default
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction
{#302}
Write line numbers in each column to show desired
Line Ringing options
No Restriction
✔
1 – 4 1 – 6
7
1 – 4
NA
1 – 8
l
1–8
Lines2
Outgoing
only
Incoming
only
NA
✔
NR
✔
No Access
No Ring
NA
✔
Delayed
✔
Immediate
✔
NA
✔
Not Assigned
NA
✔
NA
✔
A
✔
NA
✔
E
✔
A
✔
NA
✔
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1
1
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18
19
20
21
22
23
✔
✔
l
l
l
l
l
l
24
25
26
27
Assignments
Write group number (1–4).
6.
7.
1. Write S for Spanish or F for French.
=
Default
= Assigned or Active
English
= Not Assigned or Not Active
No Restriction
Centralized Telephone Programming
✔
A
Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,
Write group number (1–6).
2.
Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines to
extensions.
=
E
8.
3.
Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all
NA
NR
outgoing calls on all lines.
4. Write list number (1–8). Also see Form D, Disallowed Phone Number Lists
{#404}.
=
{CTP} =
Write list number (1–8). Also see Form D, Allowed Phone Number Lists {#407}.
5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
3 of 8
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
NightSvc
✔
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114} 1
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
SAMPLE
OCR
Template Instructions
Wake
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
●
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
✔
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12)2
Background Music (F 19)2
ACE
PARTNER-18D only
Music
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4
Call Park(I XX) 3
CF-XX XX
Park
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
1.
2.
3.
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
extension.
2
CC1
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)
Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Extension
number can
be pro-
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
2
CC2
DLPA
DLPI
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Fax Management(I XX) 2
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or *7 G)
I
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
4. You can
program the
Intercom Autodial(I XX or
*XX) 2
I
origination
extension
only or both
the
origination
and
destination
extension.
LNR
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspk
MS-XX
Loudspeaker Paging (I 70)
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)
5
MsgOff-XX
Intercom
Intercom
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
5
MsgOn-XX
Recall
SNR
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Ext.
You can
5.
Recall (F 03)
program the
extension
number.
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21)2
SPage
Lock
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button (I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
✔
✔
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
F
= Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
3 of 8
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
NightSvc
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
SAMPLE
OCR
Template Instructions
Wake
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
●
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
✔
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12) 2
Background Music (F 19) 2
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX) 2,4
Call Park(I XX) 3
ACE
Music
PARTNER-18D only
CF-XX XX
Park
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
1.
Pickup-XX
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
Drop
CC1
Conference Drop (F 06)
extension.
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2
Contact Closure 2 (F 42) 2
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line (I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
2. Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Extension
3.
number can
be pro-
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
4. You can
program the
origination
extension
only or both
the
origination
and
destination
extension.
You can
program the
extension
number.
CC2
DLPA
DLPI
ExHold
Fax Management(I XX) 2
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or *7 G)
I
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
Group Pickup(I 66 G)
Intercom Autodial(I XX or
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging (I 70)
I
*XX) 2
LNR
Loudspk
MS-XX
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)
5
MsgOff-XX
Intercom
Intercom
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
5
MsgOn-XX
Recall
SNR
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Ext.
5.
Recall (F 03)
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21) 2
SPage
Lock
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
✔
✔
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
F =
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lucent Technologies
PAGE
7 or 8
Bell Labs Innovtions
Form C7: MLS-12/12D Phone
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
NightSvc
Night Service Button {#503}
SAMPLE
OCR
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}1
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
Template Instructions
Wake
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
●
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12)2
Background Music (F 19) 2
ACE
Music
Requires Auto
Dial button for
each
1.
2.
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4
CF-XX XX
Call Park(I XX) 3
Park
extension.
Pickup-XX
Drop
Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)
Contact Closure 2 (F 42) 2
2
CC1
CC2
Extension
number can
be pro-
grammed as
Auto Dial
button.
3.
4.
DLPA
DLPI
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
Fax Management(I XX) 2
You can
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
I
* 7 G)
program the
origination
extension only
or both the
origination
and destina-
tion exten-
sion.
I
*77 G)
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
2
Intercom Autodial(I XX or
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
I
*XX)
LNR
Loudspk
MS-XX
Intercom
Intercom
Ext.
You can
5.
2
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX)
program the
extension
number.
5
MsgOff-XX
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
5
MsgOn-XX
Recall
SNR
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Recall (F 03)
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21) 2
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
SPage
Lock
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
✔
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 2: Mailbox Assignments
Mailbox
Language Assigned
Outcalling
Subscriber Name
Mailbox
Language
Outcalling
Assigned
Mailbox
Mailbox
Subscriber Name
(26
(27
(28
(29
(30
(31
(32
(33
(34
(35
(36
(37
(38
(39
(40
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
)
10 ✔
(11
(12
(13
(14
(15
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
)
)
(20
(21
(22
(23
(24
(25
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
)
)
)
Completing this Form
General Information
Mailbox To assign a mailbox to an extension other than the
factory default, cross out the factory default and write in the
extension to be used.
■
Factory defaults are identified by the
✔
symbol.
■
■
■
■
The system comes with a predetermined number of mailboxes.
The optional Mailbox Expansion Card doubles the capacity.
■
■
For PARTNER PLUS, use an extension number from 11-33.
Mailbox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and
cannot be changed.
For PARTNER Advanced Communications System, use an
extension number from 11-41.
Mailbox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time. All
other mailboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time.
■
For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48, use an extension number
from 11-57.
For system security mailboxes should be deleted where they
are not needed; for example, mailboxes should be deleted for
extensions in use by auxiliary equipment (such as a fax or
doorphone) and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt
Group.
To mark an unused mailbox for deletion without assigning an
extension, cross out the factory default.
Subscriber Name For every mailbox in use, write the name of
the mailbox subscriber.
■
Guest mailboxes can be created for users who don’t have their
own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the
mailbox number. Unused extension numbers include: 1) vacant
extension jacks in installed 206 modules and 2) extensions in
your DIAL plan higher than the last extension jack in the last
more information.
Mailbox Language For each mailbox that requires a language
different from the System Language or Primary Language
indicated on Form 1, write the name of the language in this
space. Supported languages are listed on Form 1.
Outcalling Assigned For each mailbox in use, indicate
whether Outcalling is assigned.
Programming Mailboxes
You can change a mailbox assignment by deleting an existing
mailbox and creating a new one.
■
To program mailboxes, dial [ 4 ] from the Programming Main menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 3: Menu Definition
Required for Automated Attendant Service
Description
Selector
Code
Range of Extensions
for Direct Extension
Transfer
Ext. # or Group # for
Selector Code Transfer,
or Announcement
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(10–19
(20–29
(30–39
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
(71–74, 771–776
✔
)
Transfer to Mailbox 10
✔
Completing this Form
General Information
■
For Direct Extension Transfer...
Factory defaults are identified by the
✔
symbol.
Write “Direct Extension Transfer.”
Description
■
This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu
prompts.
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer
Leave the factory default.
■
■
The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in
response to the menu prompts.
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer ... Leave blank.
In Direct Extension Transfer, Selector Codes 1–5 and 7
represent the first digit for a range of extensions. These Selector
Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly.
For Selector Extension Transfer...
Write the name of the person or group to receive
Description
the transfer.
■
In Selector Code Transfer, Selector Codes 1–9 represent a
specific extension, Group Calling number, (if available) or Hunt
Group number to which the caller will be transferred. Use the
following values:
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the
corresponding Selector Code to transfer to the extension,
announcement, or group identified in
below.
10–33 or 771–776
PARTNER Plus:
PARTNER Advanced:
PARTNER II:
Ext. #, or Group # for Selector Code Transfer...Write the
extension, announcement, or group number to receive the
transfer.
11–41, 71–74, or 771–776
10–57, 71–74, or 771–776
10–57, 71, or 771–776
PARTNER 48:
For Announcement...
Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a
single extension or group, such as the VP of Sales at extension 37
or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774.
Write “Announcement.”
Description
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer
■
Selector Code 9 lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10
(receptionist mailbox) where they can leave a message.
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the
corresponding Selector Code to hear the Announcement
identified in
below.
The Description and Selector Code number from this form will
be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts (Forms
Announcement #
Write the Announcement number (1 or 2).
■
For Announcement entries in Description, Selector Code, and
Announcement # of this form will be used to complete Forms
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 3A: Automated Attendant Announcement—
System Language or Primary Language
Required if Selector Code Transfer is set to Announcement
:
Announcement #
:
Announcement #
Completing this Form
General Information
■
Write the Announcement and its number in the space provided.
After the Announcement plays, you can program the system to
hang up or to offer callers the option of pressing *4 (to repeat
this Announcement), *7 (to return to the Main Menu), *8 (to
transfer to an extension), or 0.
Recording the Announcement(s)
■
To record the Announcement, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can
switch the language they hear while listening to the
Main Menu.
Announcement. For example, “Para español, marque * 1.”
■
■
Announcements can supply frequently requested information
so that your staff is free to assist customers or to perform other
tasks more efficiently.
An Announcement can be up to four minutes long.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 4: Day Menu Prompt—
System Language or Primary Language
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always
Completing this Form
General Information
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the
caller for selecting menu options.
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
Suggested options include:
■
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
menu options.
■
“Remain on the line for assistance.”
“Dial 0 for assistance.”
■
■
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
■
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency.”
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can
Recording the Day Menu Prompt
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,
“Para español, marque * 1.”
■
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming
■
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
Main Menu.
–
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”
–
–
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as "To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 5: Night Menu Prompt—
System Language or Primary Language
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always
–
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the
receptionist.
General Information
■
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
■
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
Completing this Form
menu options.
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for
selecting menu options.
■
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”
Suggested options include:
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,
■
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
“Para español, marque * 1.”
■
■
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
Recording the Night Menu Prompt
–
–
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a
message.”
■
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the
Programming Main Menu.
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
Case Study #2
About the Customer
Software Mexico is a small company that develops PC-based software in
Tijuana, Mexico. The company prides itself on personalized service and
customer satisfaction. The owner, Jose Ramirez, employs a staff of nine
including a receptionist, a system administrator, five programmers, a customer
service representative, and a bookkeeper. Jose and his employees speak both
English and Spanish. Sixty percent of Software Mexico’s customers speak
Spanish; the other 40 percent speak English.
Jose purchased a PARTNER Plus Release 4.1 Communications System and a
PARTNER MAIL VS Release 4 Voice Messaging System because the integrated
system can answer outside calls and offer callers the option of listening to
prompts and transferring to extensions in either English or Spanish.
Receptionist Vera Gonzalez is responsible for managing the systems;
she established these facts:
The system will have four outside lines and 12 extensions.
■
■
Jose and Vera will have PARTNER-34D phones; the other eight
employees will have PARTNER-18D phones. In addition, two standard
phones will be installed in the waiting room so customers can make
local calls.
■
Jose prefers that Vera help with various office tasks, so all lines will ring
delayed at extension 10, and the PARTNER MAIL VS system will answer
them. Vera will act as backup; she will answer calls from customers who
press 0 or stay on the line for assistance, as well as transfer returned
calls. Also, Vera will be responsible for checking the messages in the
mailbox at extension 10 and forwarding them to the appropriate people.
■
Calls will go to the Automated Attendant Service of the PARTNER
MAIL VS system during the day and at night.
■
The majority of Software Mexico’s callers have questions about their
software or inquiries about bills. Therefore, callers who receive
Automated Attendant Service and want to speak to the customer service
representative or the bookkeeper can do so easily by pressing a single
digit as explained in the Automated Attendant Service prompt.
■
Since the majority of Software Mexico’s customers speak Spanish, the
system should answer outside calls and play messages and prompts in
Spanish. Callers will have the option of listening to the prompts and
messages in English.
■
Each employee will have a mailbox and Automatic VMS Cover assigned
to his or her extension. This arrangement allows callers to leave personal
messages when the employee is unable to answer a call.
F-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
Filling Out the Planning Forms
This section explains how the System Planner for the PARTNER Plus
Release 4.1 Communications System and the forms for the PARTNER MAIL VS
Release 4 Voice Messaging System are filled out based on the facts in the
Software Mexico case. For brevity, “CS” refers to the System Planner forms for
the communications system and “VMS” refers to the forms for the voice
messaging system.
■
Write the Telephone Numbers in order customer desires: Telephone
numbers in this column represent Software Mexico’s four lines.
■
VMS-AA: In this column, checks for Lines 01, 02, 03, and 04 indicate that
unanswered calls on those lines go to the Automated Attendant Service
of the PARTNER MAIL VS system.
System Settings:
■
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? “No” on this line
indicates that Vera will backup the voice messaging system.
■
■
Music on Hold (#602): The blank line indicates that a Music on Hold
device is installed.
Ring on Transfer (#119): “NA” written in the space provided indicates
that music or recorded messages will be played while calls are being
transferred.
Line Coverage:
■
VMS Hunt Delay (#506): The blank line indicates that the Automated
Attendant Service answers outside calls immediately.
■
VMS Hunt Schedule (#507): The absence of any check mark indicates
that the Automated Attendant Service picks up unanswered calls during
business hours and after hours. (This setting is the default.)
F-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
■
Write Name/Description: In this column, the names listed for extensions
10 through 19 and 22 and 23 identify the extension assignments.
■
■
Identify Telephone Attached to this Extension: Checks in these
columns specify the type of telephone each person or location has.
“VMS” in the Write Name/Description column and checks in the
PARTNER MAIL VS column indicate that the PARTNER MAIL VS module
is installed in Slot 4 of the Control Unit. The module uses extensions 32
and 33, the last two extensions for that slot.
■
“10” in the Write Transfer Return Ext. No. column indicates that when a
call transferred by the PARTNER MAIL VS system is unanswered, it goes
to extension 10 where Vera can answer it.
■
Automatic VMS Cover: Checks in this column indicate that unanswered
calls to extensions 10 through 19 automatically are covered by the
Automated Attendant Service.
■
■
Hunt Group Extensions VMS Only: In this column, check marks for
extensions 32 and 33 satisfy the requirement that the extensions used by
the PARTNER MAIL VS module be assigned to Hunt Group 7.
Automatic Extension Privacy: In this column, check marks for the
extensions used by the PARTNER MAIL VS module indicate that
Automatic Extension Privacy is assigned to these extensions. This feature
prevents subscribers from accidentally picking up calls that are being
answered by the voice mail system.
■
PARTNER-34D phone at extension 10: Night Service, Do Not Disturb,
Voice Mail Messages, and Voice Mailbox Transfer.
The Night Service button allows Vera to turn Night Service on and off.
When Night Service is off, the Day Menu Prompt plays. When Night
Service is on, the Night Menu Prompt plays.
Vera can use the Do Not Disturb button to send callers to the general
mailbox without ringing the extension first.
The Voice Mail Messages button allows Vera to call Voice Mail Service
with one touch.
The Voice Mailbox Transfer button allows Vera to transfer callers directly
to another subscriber’s mailbox without ringing the extension first.
■
extension 11: Do Not Disturb, Voice Mail Messages, and Voice Mailbox
Transfer.
F-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
■
at extensions 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, and 19: Voice Mail Messages
and Voice Mailbox Transfer.
■
■
Language Mode: The check mark in the Bilingual box indicates that the
system allows outside callers to choose between two languages.
Primary Language: The check mark in the Latin American Spanish box
indicates that the system answers outside calls in Spanish. The check
mark in the U.S. English box for Secondary Language indicates that
the system can play messages and prompts in English when callers
press [
★
] [ 1 ].
■
■
Subscriber Name: In this column, the names listed for mailboxes 10
through 19 indicate that all employees have mailboxes.
English in the Mailbox Language column for extensions 13, 16, and 19
indicates the subscribers at those extensions prefer to listen to prompts
and messages in English when retrieving messages, recording personal
greetings, and accessing other Voice Mail Services. The rest of the
subscribers prefer prompts and messages in Spanish, the system’s
Primary Language.
Outcalling Assigned: “Yes” in this column for Jose, the system
administrator, and the customer service representative indicates that they
have Outcalling privileges, so that they can be notified of new voice mail
while they are away from their offices.
■
■
■
Description: ln this column, “Direct Extension Transfer” for Selector
Code 1 and 2 indicates that when callers get the Automated Attendant
Service they can transfer to any extension (10 to 29) by entering the
extension number.
“Customer Service” in the Description column and “18” in the Specific
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer, or Announcement #
column for Selector Code 4 indicate that when callers get the Automated
Attendant Service, they can press 4 to transfer to extension 18 (the
Customer Service representative).
■
“Customer Service” in the Description column and “19” in the Specific
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer, or Announcement #
column for Selector Code 5 indicate that when callers get the Automated
Attendant Service, they can press 5 to transfer to extension 19
(the Bookkeeper).
F-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
■
When Night Service is off and a call goes to the Automated Attendant
Language).
■
When Night Service is off and a call goes to the Automated Attendant
Language) when he or she presses [
★
] [ 1 ].
■
When Night Service is on and a call goes to the Automated Attendant
Language).
■
When Night Service is on and a call goes to the Automated Attendant
Language) when he or she presses [
★
] [ ].
1
Post-Installation Recommendations
■
Since callers can leave a message in the mailbox at extension 10, Vera
should record a general business greeting for this extension in both
Spanish and English. The greetings should instruct callers to press [ ★ ] [ 1 ]
to switch to the other language.
■
All employees should record a personal greeting in both Spanish and
English. The greetings should instruct callers to press [ ★ ] [ 1 ] to switch to
the other language. In addition, employees change the factory-set
password for their mailboxes.
F-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Case Studies
F-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
1 of 3
Form A: System Configuration
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
For additional instructions, see page 2.
Configure Hardware for Hybrid Mode (PARTNER II system only):
6.
Customer Billing Name
1.
❑
Yes
If yes, call local telephone company—
❑
No
MF Mode and FCC # AS5 USA-21312-MF-E
2. Installation Address
7. Features Customer is most interested in (most important first):
Phone
Phone
Contact Name
3.
4.
Alternate Trainee’s Name
Phone
Person to be Trained
(
)
–
(
)
–
Phone
Salesperson’s Name
Lucent Technologies Sales Force
Dealer:
❑
❑
5. Sold by
System Lines
8.
Line Coverage—You can select one per line
Hybrid Mode
Only:
Write
R if
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write7
Ext. No.
VMS- 6
Mail
{#206} for Call
Cover
or
{#208} {#208}
3
5
4
1
2
Identify other Local
Telephone Company
Subscription Services
(e.g., Repeat Call)
Check
if
Write User’s Name for
Personal or Owned Line
or Identify Equipment for
Dedicated Line
VMS-
AA
{#206}
Hunt
ASA
AA
DXD
Write the Telephone
Numbers in order
customer desires
(list personal and
dedicated lines last)
Line
Jack
No.
Rotary
(Dial
Group
Write auxiliary
pool 881, 882,
883 or No Pool
{#207}
Caller
ID
ll {#205}
{#204} (write no.)
{#206}
{#607}
Pulse)
Line
{#201}
Only one of these
Service
types per system
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
✔
✔
✔
✔
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
5.
6.
MAIL or PARTNER MAIL VS column.
Write extension number of line owner eligible for Call Coverage. Also write line owner’s name in next
column.
2.
3.
column.
7.
4.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PAGE
2 of 3
Form A: System Configuration
Lucent Technologies
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.
For additional instructions, see page 3.
Bell Labs Innovations
lf VMS-AA is checked, specify the following:
VMS-AA:
System Settings. Write response on line for each item.
9.
VMS Hunt Delay {#506}—By default, VMS answers calls after 2 rings. Write “Del” if
●
.
Receptionist answers calls during business hours? Write “Yes” or “No”
.
calls ring 4 times before VMS answers
●
Number of Lines {#104}—By default, 2 lines per 206 module and 4 lines per 400 module
VMS Hunt Schedule {#507}—By default, VMS is on all the time. Check if Day only or
Night only is desired:
are assigned to each extension (or to pool 880 in PARTNER II Hybrid Mode). Write
.
number if different from default
Day only
❑ Night only
❑
●
Transfer Return Rings {#105}—By default, a transferred call rings 4 times before going to
the transfer return extension. Write number (0-9, 0 = no return) if different from
default
.
(PARTNER II system only) If ASA is checked, specify the following:
ASA:
Automatic System Answer Delay {#110}—By default, a call rings 2 times before it is
●
●
●
●
●
●
Outside Conference Denial {#109}—By default, a conference call can include 2 outside
.
answered by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default
.
parties. Write “No” if 2 outside parties are not allowed
Automatic System Answer Mode {#121}—By default, ASA calls are put on hold after the
greeting plays. Check if calls should continue to ring or be disconnected:
Call Coverage Rings {#116} (PARTNER II only)—By default, a covered call rings 2 times
before going to the covering extention. Write number (1-9) if different from default
.
❑ Ring
VMS Cover Rings {#117}—By default, a call rings 3 times before going to the user’s mailbox.
❑
Disconnect
.
Write number (1-9) if different from default
Ring on Transfer {#119}—By default, the caller hears ringing when the call is transferred.
Write “NA” if music on hold or silence is desired
Toll Call Prefix {#402}—By default, 0 or 1 must be dialed before the area code for a
ASA Record/Playback (I 891)—message of up to 10 seconds that caller hears
when the call is answered by the Automatic System Answer feature. Write
message below and record from extension 10 or 11:
.
.
long distance call. Write “No” if 0 or 1 is not required
System Password {#403}—By default, no password is programmed to override dialing
restrictions and to turn Night Service on and off. Write 4 digits if password is
.
desired
Music on Hold {#602}—By default, the Music on Hold jack on the processor module is
active. Write “No” if the jack is deactivated
●
.
10.
DXD: (PARTNER II system only) If DXD is checked, specify the following:
Direct Extension Dial Delay {#112}—By default, a call rings 2 times before it is answered
.
by the system. Write number (0-9) if different from default
Direct Extension Dial Record/Playback (I 892)—message of up to 20 seconds that caller
hears when call is answered with the Direct Extension Dial feature. Write message below
and record from extension 10 or 11:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lucent Technologies
PAGE
1 of 3
Bell Labs Innovations
Form B1: System Extensions
Required for PARTNER II System and PARTNER Plus System.
For additional instructions, see page 5.
Identify Telephone
Attached to this Extension
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Identify Auxiliary Equipment
Attached to this Extension
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Transfer
Return
Ext. No.
{#306}
Write in
Other
Equipment
Ext.
Jack
No.
Write Name/Description
✔
✔
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18
19
20
21
22
23
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
✔
✔
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
24
25
32
33
l
l
l
l
10
10
✔
✔
IMPORTANT: A system display phone is required for programming at extension 10 or 11. Extension 10 typically is the receptionist’s extension.
Extension 11 is recommended as a second programming extension (typically the System Manager’s extension).
Group Assignments, VMS Only.
Check corresponding alert extensions in next column. To prevent outside calls, remove all outside lines—see
6.
1.
2.
If checked, see Form B1, Page 3 of 3.
If there is a mix of PARTNER-model and MLS-model phones, write “P” for PARTNER and “M” for MLS.
7.
8.
3. Write “T” for touch-tone or “R” for rotary. If Call Waiting is desired, check next column.
4.
Must be standard phone. If immediate dialing is required, use a dedicated line. Do not assign restrictions that
prevent dialing the outside number, Forced Account Code Entry {#307}, or groups. Also see Form D, External
Hotline {#311}.
Standard phone is recommended. Write extension number of corresponding alert extension or “70” for loudspeaker
paging system in next column.
Also write Transfer Return Ext. No. {#306} on this form.
9.
10. Write “1,” “2,” or “B” (for Both) to identify which Contact Closure the extension can activate.
5.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
PAGE
1 of 2
Form B2: Customized Extension Settings
Required if you want to change extension settings from defaults for PARTNER II System
and PARTNER Plus System. For additional instructions, see pages 6 and 7.
Identify
Group Assignments
Identify Restrictions/Permissions
If Different than Defaults
Identify Line Ringing {CTP} Option
If Different than Default
Identify Extension Settings
if Different than Default
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write line numbers for Line Access Restriction
{#302}
Write line numbers in each column to show desired
Line Ringing options
No Restriction
✔
7
1 – 4
1 – 4
Lines2
Incoming
only
1 – 6
NA
1 – 8
1 – 8
l
Outgoing
only
NA
✔
NA
✔
No Access
No Ring
Delayed
Immediate
✔
NA
✔
✔
NA
✔
Not Assigned
NA
✔
NA
✔
A
✔
NA
✔
E
✔
NA
✔
A
✔
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
✔
10
11
12
13
14
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
15
16
17
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
18
19
20
21
22
23
l
l
l
l
l
l
24
25
32
33
✔
✔
Assignments
1.
2.
Write S for Spanish or F for French.
Use Line Assignment {#301} to remove lines from or assign lines to exten-
sions.
Write group number (1–4).
7. Write group number (1–4). If a loudspeaker is connected and Simultaneous Paging is desired,
Write group number (1–6).
6.
=
Default
= Assigned or Active
English
✔
A
=
E
3. Write IN for Inside Only or LOC for Local Only to indicate restrictions for all
8.
= Not Assigned or Not Active
= No Restriction
NA
NR
{CTP}
outgoing calls onall lines.
Write list number (1–8). Also see Form D, Disallowed Phone Number Lists
{#404}.
4.
=
Centralized Telephone Programming
5. Write list number (1–8). Also see Form D, Allowed Phone Number Lists {#407}.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lucent Technologies
PAGE
1 of 8
Bell Labs Innovations
Form C1: PARTNER-34D Phone
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
NightSvc
OCR
SAMPLE
✔
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
1
Template Instructions
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
Wake
●
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
●
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
✔
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12)2
ACE
Background Music (F 19) 2
Music
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4
CF-XX XX
3
Park
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
1.
2.
Call Park (I XX)
Pickup-XX
Call Pickup (I 6 XX)
Drop
CC1
Conference Drop (F 06)
extension.
2
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)
Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Extension
number can
be pro-
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
2
CC2
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)
DLPA
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
DLPI
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
3.
2
Fax Management (I XX)
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
I
*7 G)
I
*77 G)
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
LNR
4. You can
program the
Intercom Autodial(I XX or
*XX) 2
I
origination
extension
only or both
the
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspk
MS-XX
MsgOff-XX
Loudspeaker Paging (I 70)
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2
origination
5
and
destination
extension.
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
5
MsgOn-XX
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
5.
Recall
SNR
You can
Recall (F 03)
program the
Intercom
Intercom
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21) 2
extension
number.
SPage
Ext.
Lock
TT-EN
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
✔
✔
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
F=
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lucent Technologies
Bell Labs Innovations
PAGE
3 of 8
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
NightSvc
OCR
SAMPLE
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
Template Instructions
1
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
Wake
●
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
● If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
✔
Priv
Privacy (F 07)
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12)2
PARTNER-18D only
ACE
Background Music (F 19)2
Music
2,4
CF-XX XX
Park
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)
3
Call Park (I XX)
1.
2.
3.
Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
Contact Closure 1 (F 41) 2
extension.
CC1
Button with
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
Extension
number can
be pro-
2
CC2
DLPA
DLPI
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
2
Fax Management (I XX)
Group Calling-Ring/Page (I 7 G or
I
*7 G)
grammed
as Auto Dial
button.
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
I
*77 G)
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
4.
You can
2
Intercom Autodial (I XX or
I
*XX)
program the
origination
extension
only or both
the
LNR
Loudspk
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2
MS-XX
origination
and
Intercom
Intercom
5
MsgOff-XX
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
destination
extension.
You can
program the
extension
number.
Message Light On (F 09 XX) 5
MsgOn-XX
Ext.
Recall
SNR
SPage
Recall (F 03)
5.
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
2
Lock
TT-EN
Station Lock (F 21)
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
✔
✔
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
F = Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom button XX = Extension
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lucent Technologies
PAGE
Bell Labs Innovations
Form C3: PARTNER-18/18D Phone
3 of 8
Make as many copies as you need. Use template and/or checklist.
For additional instructions, see pages 8 through 13.
Check Desired Features
Also write in extension or group number
Night Service Button {#503}
Outgoing Call Restriction Button {#114}
Wake Up Service Button {#115}
Caller ID Inspect (F 17)
NightSvc
OCR
SAMPLE
1
Template Instructions
Wake
●
If desired, write in line number, dial code feature, or auto dial number
●
●
ID-Inspect
ID-Name
DND
If desired, write in Line Access Restriction
Caller ID Name Display (F 16)
Do Not Disturb (F 01)
✔
Privacy (F 07)
Priv
VMSCover
VIOB
VMS Cover (F 15)
Voice Interrupt on Busy Talk-Back (F 18)
Account Code Entry (F 12)2
Background Music (F 19) 2
Call Forwarding/Call Follow-Me (F 11 XX XX)2,4
Call Park(I XX) 3
ACE
PARTNER-18D only
Music
CF-XX XX
Park
1. Requires
Auto Dial
button for
each
Pickup-XX
Drop
Call Pickup(I 6 XX)
Conference Drop (F 06)
extension.
2
Contact Closure 1 (F 41)
CC1
2. Button with
2
CC2
Contact Closure 2 (F 42)
lights is
recom-
mended, but
not required.
DLPA
Direct Line Pickup-Active Line(I 68)
Direct Line Pickup-Idle Line(I 8)
Exclusive Hold (F 02)
DLPI
Extension
number can
3.
ExHold
FAX-XX
GCall-g
Hunt-g
P/U Grp-g
Ext-XX
LNR
Fax Management(I XX) 2
be pro-
grammed
as Auto Dial
Group Calling-Ring/Page(I 7 G or
Group Hunt-Ring/Signal(I 77 G or
Group Pickup (I 66 G)
I
*7 G)
I
*77 G)
button.
4. You can
2
program the
Intercom Autodial (I XX or
Last Number Redial (F 05)
Loudspeaker Paging(I 70)
I
*XX)
origination
extension
only or both
Loudspk
MS-XX
MsgOff-XX
MsgOn-XX
Recall
SNR
the
Manual Signaling (F 13 XX or F 13 *XX) 2
origination
5
and
Message Light Off (F 10 XX)
Intercom
Intercom
destination
extension.
5
Message Light On (F 09 XX)
Ext.
Recall (F 03)
5.
You can
program the
extension
Save Number Redial (F 04)
Simultaneous Paging(I * 70)
Station Lock (F 21)2
SPage
Lock
number.
Specify Automatic Line Selection:
TT-EN
VMMsgs-777
VMBox
Touch-Tone Enable (F 08)
Voice Mail Messages Button(I 777)
Voice Mailbox Transfer (F 14)
Identify extensions programmed as shown:
✔
✔
Feature button G = Group I = Left Intercom buttom XX = Extension
F =
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 1: Language
Language Mode:
Monolingual
Bilingual
✔
Monolingual Mode–System Language:
U.S. English ✔
U.K. English
Latin American Spanish
Canadian French
Other–specifiy
Bilingual Mode–Primary Language:
U.S. English ✔
U.K. English
Latin American Spanish
Canadian French
Other–specify
Billingual Mode–Secondary Language:
U.S. English
U.K. English
Latin American Spanish ✔
Canadian French
Other–specify
Completing this Form
General Information
Check “Billingual” if the Language Mode
Language Mode
■
Factory defaults are identified by the
✔
symbol.
should be set to Bilingual. If you check Bilingual, also see
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, make sure you record
the Automated Attendant Day Menu Prompts and Night Menu
Prompts and Announcements (if any) in both the Primary and
Secondary Languages. AIso, subscribers can record two
personal greetings—one in the Primary Language and another
in the Secondary Language.
below; if not, see
.
Check the Primary
Monolingual Mode—System Language
language desired if different from the default.
Check the Primary
Billingual Mode—Primary Language
Language desired if different from the default.
■
Subscribers can have a Mailbox Language different from the
languages selected here. Mailbox Language is specified on
Billingual Mode—Secondary Language
Check the
Secondary Language desired if different from the default.
Programming Language
■
To program the Language Mode, as well as the System
Language in Monolingual Mode or the Primary and Secondary
Languages in Bilingual Mode, dial [ 1 ] from the Programming
Main Menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 2: Mailbox Assignments
Mailbox
Mailbox
Language
Outcalling
Assigned
Subscriber Name
Mailbox
Mailbox
Language
Outcalling
Assigned
Subscriber Name
10 ✔
(26
(27
(28
(29
(30
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
)
)
(11 ✔)
(12 ✔)
(13 ✔)
(14 ✔)
(15 ✔)
(16 ✔)
(31
(32
(33
(34
✔
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
)
(17
✔
)
(18 ✔)
(19 ✔)
(20 ✔)
(35
(36
(37
(38
(39
(40
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
)
)
)
(21 ✔)
(22 ✔)
(23 ✔)
(24 ✔)
(25 ✔)
General Information
Completing this Form
■
Mailbox To assign a mailbox to an extension other than the
factory default, cross out the factory default and write in the
extension to be used.
Factory defaults are identified by the
✔
symbol.
■
■
■
■
The system comes with a predetermined number of mailboxes.
The optional Mailbox Expansion Card doubles the capacity.
■
■
For PARTNER PLUS, use an extension number from 11-33.
Mailbox 10 is reserved for the receptionist at extension 10 and
cannot be changed.
For PARTNER Advanced Communications System, use an
extension number from 11-41.
Mailbox 10 provides 60 minutes of message recording time. All
other mailboxes provide 20 minutes of message recording time.
■
For PARTNER II or PARTNER 48, use an extension number
from 11-57.
For system security, mailboxes should be deleted where they
are not needed; for example, mailboxes should be deleted for
extensions in use by auxiliary equipment (such as a fax or
doorphone) and the extensions assigned to the VMS Hunt
Group.
To mark an unused mailbox for deletion without assigning an
extension, cross out the factory default.
Subscriber Name For every mailbox in use, write the name of
the mailbox subscriber.
■
Guest mailboxes can be created for users who don’t have their
own phone by assigning an unused extension number as the
mailbox number. Unused extension numbers include: 1) vacant
extension jacks in installed 206 modules and 2) extensions in
your DIAL plan higher than the last extension jack in the last
more information.
Mailbox Language For each mailbox that requires a language
different from the System Language or Primary Language
Outcalling Assigned For each mailbox in use, indicate
whether Outcalling is assigned.
Programming Mailboxes
You can change a mailbox assignment by deleting an existing
mailbox and creating a new one.
■
To program mailboxes, dial [ 4 ] from the Programming Main menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 3: Menu Definition
Required for Automated Attendant Service
Description
Range of Extensions
for Direct Extension
Transfer
Selector
Code
Ext. # or Group # for
Selector Code Transfer,
or Announcement #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(10–19
(20–29
(30–39
✔
✔
✔
)
)
)
(71–74, 771–776
✔
)
Transfer to Mailbox 10
✔
General Information
Completing this Form
■
Factory defaults are identified by the
✔
symbol.
For Direct Extension Transfer...
Description Write “Direct Extension Transfer.”
This Menu Definition applies to both the Day and Night Menu
prompts.
■
■
■
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer
Leave the factory default.
The Selector Code is the first digit dialed by the caller in
response to the menu prompts.
Ext. # or Group # for Selector Code Transfer ...Leave blank.
In Direct Extension Transfer, Selector Codes 1–5 and 7
represent the first digit for a range of extensions. These Selector
Codes let callers dial extension numbers directly.
For Selector Extension Transfer...
Write the name of the person or group to receive
Description
the transfer.
■
In Selector Code Transfer, Selector Codes 1–9 represent a
specific extension, Group Calling number, (if available) or Hunt
Group number to which the caller will be transferred. Use the
following values:
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the
corresponding Selector Code to transfer to the extension,
announcement, or group identified in
below.
10–33 or 771–776
PARTNER Plus:
PARTNER Advanced:
PARTNER II:
Ext. #, or Group # for Selector Code Transfer...Write the
extension, announcement, or group number to receive the
transfer.
11–41, 71–74, or 771–776
10–57, 71–74, or 771–776
10–57, 71, or 771–776
PARTNER 48:
For Announcement...
Selector Code Transfer lets callers dial a single digit to reach a
single extension or group, such as the VP of Sales at extension 37
or the order processing operators assigned to Hunt Group 774.
Description
Write “Announcement.”
Range of Extensions for Direct Extension Transfer
Cross out the factory default if you want the caller to dial the
corresponding Selector Code to hear the Announcement
■
■
Selector Code 9 lets callers transfer directly to mailbox 10
(receptionist mailbox) where they can leave a message.
identified in
below.
The Description and Selector Code number from this form will
be used to complete the Day and Night Menu Prompts (Forms
Write the Announcement number (1 or 2).
Announcement #
■
For Announcement entries in Description, Selector Code, and
Announcement # of this form will be used to complete Forms
3A and 3B.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 4: Day Menu Prompt—
System Language or Primary Language
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always
Completing this Form
General Information
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the
caller for selecting menu options.
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
Suggested options include:
■
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
menu options.
■
“Remain on the line for assistance.”
■
“Dial 0 for assistance.”
■
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
■
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency”
■
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can
Recording the Day Menu Prompt
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,
“Para español, marque * 1.”
■
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming
■
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
Main Menu.
–
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as “To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”
–
–
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 4A: Day Menu Prompt—Secondary Language
Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Day Only or Always
Completing this Form
General Information
■
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
during normal business hours, including the instructions to the
caller for selecting menu options.
The Day Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Day Only or Always and Night Service is off.
The Day Menu Prompt and the Night Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
Suggested options include:
■
■
■
The Day Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
menu options.
■
■
■
“Remain on the line for assistance.”
“Dial 0 for assistance.”
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
“Thank you for calling the Any Travel Agency”
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language.
For example, “For English, press * 1.”
Recording the Day Menu Prompt
■
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
■
To record the Day Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the Programming
Main Menu.
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now.”
–
–
–
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as “To speak to someone in sales, press 6.”
If callers can can choose an Announcement, include that
information. For example, “For directions to our office, press 4.”
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 5: Night Menu Prompt—
System Language or Primary Language
Required if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always
–
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the
receptionist.
General Information
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
■
Completing this Form
menu options.
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for
selecting menu options.
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”
■
Suggested options include:
If the system is set for Bilingual Mode, let callers know they can
■
switch the language they hear while on the call. For example,
■
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
“Para español, marque * 1.”
■
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
■
Recording the Night Menu Prompt
–
–
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a
message.”
■
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the
Programming Main Menu.
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Form 5A: Night Menu Prompt—Secondary Language
Required for Bilingual Mode only if VMS Hunt Schedule is set to Night Only or Always
If Selector Code 9 is left as the default, the prompt should
–
General Information
instruct callers to press 9 to leave a message with the
receptionist.
■
The Night Menu Prompt plays to callers when the VMS Hunt
Schedule is set to Night Only or Always and Night Service is
on. The Night Menu Prompt and the Day Menu Prompt use the
same Menu Definition.
It is recommended that you keep the number of menu options to 5
or less to avoid confusing the caller.
■
■
The Night Menu Prompt should contain a welcome and a list of
menu options.
Completing this Form
Write the message that you want callers to hear when they call
after normal business hours, including instructions to the caller for
selecting menu options.
The welcome should introduce the company. For example,
“You have reached the Any Travel Agency. Our hours are 9 AM
to 5 PM, Monday through Friday.”
Suggested options include:
■
■
Let callers know they can switch back to the Primary Language.
For example, “For English, press * 1.”
■
■
“Dial 9 or remain on the line to leave a message.”
“To hear this menu again, dial * 4.”
The menu options should contain instructions that correspond
–
If callers can dial extension numbers (Direct Extension
Transfer), the prompt should instruct callers to dial the
extension number. For example, “If you know the extension
of the person you want to reach, dial it now and leave a
message.”
Recording the Night Menu Prompt
■
To record the Night Menu Prompt, dial [ 3 ] from the
Programming Main Menu.
–
If callers can dial a single digit to transfer to an extension or
group (Selector Code Transfer), the prompt should provide
instructions such as “To leave a message for Pat, press 6.”
Keep in mind that there are no group mailboxes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
C
A
Call Answer Service
Announcement
A component of the voice messaging system that lets
callers leave a message at an unanswered extension or
transfer to another extension.
An informative message that provides frequently
requested information. It is recorded by the System
Manager and plays to callers who select it from an
Automated Attendant’s Menu.
Calling Group
A group of extensions that can be called simultaneously
by dialing a group calling code. This feature may not be
available on your system; check your Programming and
Auto Dial button
A programmable button on a system phone that lets the
user dial a series of digits simply by pressing that button.
An Auto Dial button can be used to dial the voice
messaging system with one touch. See also
Centralized Telephone Programming
A method of telephone programming that lets you
program individual extensions in the system from a
system display phone at extension 10 (or 11 if available).
Centralized Telephone Programming is an alternative to
Extension Programming.
Automated Attendant Service
A component of the voice messaging system that
consists of a menu definition and prompt. It provides
outside callers with options enabling them to reach an
extension, a Hunt Group, or (for PARTNER II systems) a
Calling Group, by pressing a single digit or by dialing an
extension or group number.
Control Unit
Hardware that connects lines coming into the building to
the extensions in the system and also provides system
features.
Auxiliary equipment
Telecommunications equipment (other than system
phones) that can be connected to the control unit.
Auxiliary equipment includes industry standard devices
that can connect directly to the public telephone network
(such as doorphones or fax machines) as well as devices
that require the interface provided by the control unit
(such as a loudspeaker paging system).
Communications system
The control unit and system phones, plus all other
telecommunications devices that are connected to
the control unit. Certain releases of PARTNER Plus,
PARTNER II, PARTNER 48, and PARTNER Advanced
communications systems can be used with the PARTNER
MAIL VS system.
Automatic VMS Cover
A communications system feature that provides voice
mail coverage for a subscriber’s unanswered transferred
and intercom calls.
D
Delayed Call Handling
A communications system feature that allows the
communications system to send incoming outside calls to
the Automated Attendant Service if the receptionist does
B
Bilingual Mode
A Language Mode setting that allows messages and
prompts to be played in either of two languages. See
also Monolingual Mode.
Dial plan
The range of extensions provided for a specific system.
The PARTNER Plus system includes extensions 10-33;
the PARTNER ACS includes extensions 10-41; the
PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems include
extensions 10-57.
Do Not Disturb
A communications system feature that can be used in
conjunction with automatic or manual voice coverage to
send callers immediately to a subscriber’s mailbox rather
than ringing the extension first.
GL-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
E
H
Extension
Hunt Group
An endpoint in the system (numbered 10-33 for PARTNER
A group of extensions that takes incoming or transferred
Plus system; 10-41 for PARTNER ACS; 10-57 for
PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems) that connects
telephones or standard devices, which can be dialed
using the Intercom button. See also Extension number
calls in round-robin fashion. Calls to the Hunt Group are
directed to the first available extension in the group, with
the extension that answered most recently being the last
Extension coverage
A feature that allows callers to leave messages or transfer
to another extension when the extension called is busy or
not answered, and Automatic VMS Cover is on.
I
Extension jack
Immediate Call Handling
The six jacks on the lower half of a 206 module that allow
you to connect phones (or other telecommunications
devices) to the control unit.
A communications system feature that allows the
Automated Attendant Service to answer every incoming
outside call on specified lines and play the Automated
Extension Line Coverage
A voice messaging system feature that lets a subscriber’s
extension (mailbox) be assigned as the owner of a
covered line. When a call comes in on the covered line,
the system routes the caller to the mailbox specified as
the line owner if the call is not answered. See also Line
Coverage Extension.
Industry-standard device
A telephone or other telecommunications device that can
be connected directly to the public telephone network.
See also Standard phone.
Intercom call
Extension number
A call that is made to another system extension.
The number assigned to each extension jack on a 206
module. Extension jack numbers run consecutively from
10 through 33 for the PARTNER Plus system, 10 through
41 for the PARTNER ACS, and 10 through 57 for the
PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems. They are used
for intercom calling.
L
Language Mode
Extension Programming
Line Coverage Extension
A method of telephone programming that lets users
program their own extensions from their system phones.
See also Centralized Telephone Programming.
A communications system feature that directs incoming
calls on a specific line to a specific extension.
Line jack
The location on 206 and 400 modules that allow you to
connect outside lines to the control unit.
G
Line number
The number assigned to each line jack on a 206 or 400
module. Line jack numbers run consecutively from 01
through 12 (for a PARTNER Plus system), 01 through 15
(for a PARTNER ACS), or from 01 through 24 (for
PARTNER II and PARTNER 48 systems).
Group Call Distribution
A communications system feature that directs incoming
calls on specified lines to a Hunt Group for either
Automated Attendant Service or Line Coverage. See also
Line Ownership
A voice messaging system feature that lets you program
VMS Line Coverage. See also Group Call Distribution and
G L-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
P
M
Primary Language
M ailb ox
In Bilingual Mode, the language callers initially hear when
they call in to the voice messaging system. See also
Secondary Language.
A storage area for messages associated with a system
subscriber.
Mailbox Language
Programmable button
The language assigned to a subscriber’s mailbox.
A system phone button that does not have a line
assigned; it can be set up to dial a number or access a
feature.
Mailbox Password
A code of up to four digits that subscribers enter to log in
to the voice messaging system. A password is used to
keep messages confidential.
Programming extension
An extension from which you can program the
communications system. It can be either extension 10 (or
11 if available).
Menu Definition
A voice messaging system feature that lets you customize
the Automated Attendant Service transfer options
available to outside callers.
Menu Prompt
The customized day or night message that an outside
caller hears after the Automated Attendant Service
answers the call.
R
Receptionist
Monolingual Mode
The person who primarily is responsible for answering
outside calls. This is the person at extension 10.
A Language Mode setting that allows messages and
prompts to be played in one of several available
Music On Hold system
Equipment that lets you play recorded music or
messages to callers who are placed on hold. A music-
on-hold audio source must be connected to the
processor module in the control unit.
S
Secondary Language
In Bilingual Mode, the language callers have the option of
hearing when they call in to the voice messaging system.
See also Primary Language.
Selector Code
N
A single digit (1-9) used to define transfer options for
outside callers on the Automated Attendant Service
menu. See also Menu Definition and Menu Prompt.
Night Service
A communications system feature that is used in
conjunction with Automated Attendant Service to activate
the Night Menu Prompt.
Send All Calls
A communications system feature that lets subscribers
use Do Not Disturb to send callers immediately to their
mailbox (calls do not ring the extension first) provided
voice mail coverage is on at the extension.
Standard phone
O
An industry-standard touch-tone or rotary phone such as
you might have in your home. Some standard phones
include special feature buttons for frequently used calling
On-touch Intercom Calling button
Outcalling
Subscriber
A user who is assigned a mailbox.
System Language
A voice messaging system feature that, when assigned to
a subscriber, allows the subscriber to have the system
call a pager or telephone number according to a
predefined schedule whenever a new message is
received in the subscriber’s voice mailbox.
In Monolingual Mode, the language callers hears when
they call in to the voice messaging system.
GL-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
System Manager
VMS Hunt Schedule
The person responsible for managing both the
communications and voice messaging systems.
System phone
A communications system feature that allows you to set
the communications system to route outside calls to the
Automated Attendant Service always, only when the Night
Service button at the receptionist’s extension is on, or
only when the Night Service button is off.
A telephone that is specifically designed for use with
PARTNER systems. Models include the PARTNER-34D,
PARTNER-18D, PARTNER-18, PARTNER-6, MLS-34D,
MLS-18D, MLS-12, MLS-12D, MLS-6, MDC 9000, and
MDW 9000 phones.
VMS Line Coverage
A voice messaging system feature that lets the System
Manager associate a personal line with a specific
subscriber’s mailbox for voice mail coverage. See also
System programming
Procedures that allow you to customize the
communications system settings. System programming
requires a system display phone and is done from
extension 10 (or 11 if available).
Voice Mail Service
A component of the voice messaging system that allows
subscribers to listen to and delete messages, record
personal greetings, and change their passwords. It also
allows the System Manager to program the voice
messaging system.
T
Voice Mailbox
Telephone programming
Voice Mailbox Transfer button
A button on a system phone that enables the user to
transfer a call directly to a subscriber’s mailbox.
Customizes extensions to meet the needs of individual
users, including the assignment of features to
programmable buttons. Telephone Programming can be
done either centrally or from the user’s own extension.
Voice messaging system (VMS)
An optional device that automates call handling: answers
calls and routes them to caller designated extension;
permits callers to leave messages at unanswered
extensions; and allows subscribers to retrieve their
Tutor
A voice messaging system feature that lets any
communications system user access and listen to
information about their phone and commonly-used
communications system features.
206 module
A system module that contains jacks for connecting up to
two outside lines and up to six extensions.
V
VMS Cover button
A button on a system phone that allows a subscriber to
turn voice mail coverage on and off manually at that
VMS Hunt Delay
A communications system feature that lets you set the
Automated Attendant to handle calls using either
Immediate Call Handling or Delayed Call Handling. See
VMS Hunt Group
Hunt Group 7, reserved by the communications system to
identify extensions associated with the voice messaging
system hardware. See also VMS Hunt Delay and VMS
Hunt Schedule.
G L-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Communications system programming
A
Automated Attendant Announcement
Automated Attendant Service
D
Day Menu Prompt
B
Button programming
E
C
Extension coverage
Extensions
Extensions coverage
Call Answer Service
Call handling
Changing language
CO Line Coverage
F
IN-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
G
M
Group Call Distribution
Mailbox Expansion Card
Mailboxes
Guest mailboxes
Menu definition
H
I
Installation
N
K
Night Menu Prompt
Night Service
L
Line Ownership
Login
O
Outcalling
Outcalling privileges
IN -2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
P
T
PARTNER MAIL VS
Transfer
Password
Transfer Return Extension
Planning forms
Problems
Programming
V
Programming Main Menu
VMS extensions
VMS Hunt Delay
VMS Hunt Schedule
R
Receptionist
Voice mail coverage
Reinitializing
Voice Mail Service
Voice Mailbox Transfer
Voice messaging system
S
System Manager
Voice messaging system programming
IN-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 7 7 )
Call Voice Mail Service (Press
Enter Login (Press
Intercom
)
9 9 #
Enter Mailbox Password
#
)
1 2 3 4
for factory default and
(Press
Select Programming Main Menu
)
(Press
9
Line
Ownership
(Press[ 6 ])
Mailboxes
(Press[ 4 ])
Automated
Attendant
(Press[ 3 ])
Language
(Press[ 1 ])
Mailbox Number
(Enter Number
Scan Line
Ownership
(Press[ 2 ])
Language
Mode
(Press[ 1 ])
Day Menu
(Press[ 1 ])
+[ # ])
Assign Line
Ownership
(Press[ 4 ])
Monolingual
Mode
Yes
No
Mailbox
Number
Exists?
Bilingual
Mode?
No
Yes
(Press[ 1 ])
Modify Line
Ownership
(Press[ 6 ])
Play Primary
Day Prompt
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ])
Play Day
Prompt
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ])
Bilingual
Mode
(Press[ 2 ])
Create
Mailbox
(Press[ 4 ])
Reinitialize
Password
(Press[ 3 ])
Delete Line
Ownership
Play Secondary
Day Prompt
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ])
Play Menu
System
Language
(Press[ 2 ])
Definition
&
Annc.
Reinitialize
Mailbox
(Press[ ][ 3 ])
*
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ][ 1 ])
(Press[ 4 ])
Play Menu
Definition & Annc.
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ])
Modify Menu
Definition and/or
Day Prompt
No
Yes
Bilingual
Mode?
Administer
Outcalling
(Press[ 5 ])
System Reset–
Save All
(Press[ 6 ])
(Press
[ 9 ][ 8 ][ 9 ][ 7 ][ 3 ][ 7 ][ 3 ][ 8 ])
Modify Menu
Definition and/or
Primary Day Prompt
(Press[ 6 ])
Play System
Language
(Press[ 2 ])
Play Primary
Language
(Press[ 1 ][ 2 ])
Program Mailbox
Language
(Press[ 6 ])
Modify System
Language
(Press[ 6 ])
Play Secondary
Language
(Press[ 2 ][ 2 ])
Delete
Mailbox
Night Menu
(Press[ 2 ])
(Press[ ][ 3 ])
*
Modify Primary
Language
(Prees[ 1 ][ 6 ])
Yes
No
Bilingual
Mode?
Modify Secondary
Language
Play Primary
Night Prompt
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 1 ])
Play
Night Prompt
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ])
(Press[ 2 ][ 6 ])
Modify
Night Prompt
(Press[ 6 ])
Play Secondary
Night Prompt
(Press[ 2 ][ 1 ][ 2 ])
Modify Primary
Night Prompt
(Press[ 6 ][ 1 ])
Modify Secondary
Night Prompt
(Press[ 6 ][ 2 ])
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Flowchart
A
START
Yes
Modify the Language Mode.
system should be programmed for
Bilingual Mode.
extensions for the PARTNER MAIL VS
system.
V1
No
different Primary Language is
specified. If so, modify the Primary
different System Language is specified.
If so, modify the System Language.
V 2
Use Hunt Group Extensions (#505) to
assign the PARTNER MAIL VS
extensions to Hunt Group 7.
C1
Language.
V 3
different Secondary Language is
specified. If so, modify the Secondary
Use Transfer Return Extension
(#306)* to specify extension 10 as the
transfer return extension for each of
the PARTNER MAIL VS extensions.
C 2
Go To B
Language.
V3
Go To B
Go To A
Key:
●
Refers to the System Planner
forms for the
CS –
Communications System.
Refers to the forms for the
Voice Messaging System.
Refers to the quick reference
programming procedure for
the Communications System.
●
●
VMS –
C# –
●
Refers to a quick reference
V# –
programming procedure for
the Voice Messaging System.
Note: C#/V# procedures follow this
flowchart.
* In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications
system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Flowchart
C
B
default mailboxes:
Program the Menu Definition and Day
Menu Prompt.
●
Yes
If there are extensions that do not
Program the appropriate extension,
announcement, or group numbers for
Selector Code Transfer as specified
determine if Selector Code Transfer or
Announcement is used.
require mailboxes, use Delete
Mailboxes to remove the mailboxes
from those extensions
V17
V 4
Monolingual
●
V 5
If other extensions require
Bilingual
mailboxes, use Create Mailboxes to
assign available mailboxes.
V18
Record the Announcement(s) as
set for Bilingual Mode, also record the
Announcement(s) in the Secondary
see if a different Mailbox Language is
specified for any active mailboxes. If
V10
Monolingual
V11
Bilingual
so, modify Mailbox Language.
V21
No
Yes Record the Day Menu Prompt as
a Day Menu Prompt is used.
set for Bilingual Mode, also record the
Day Menu Prompt in the Secondary
see if Outcalling is assigned for any
active mailboxes. If so, assign
outcalling.
V 4
Monolingual
V22
V 5
Bilingual
No
Yes
Record the Night Menu Prompt as
Go To D
a Night Menu Prompt is used.
set for Bilingual Mode, also record the
Night Menu Prompt in the Secondary
V8
Monolingual
V 9
Bilingual
No
REFER to the Programing and Use
guide for the communications system
for instructions on setting up Music On
Hold.
No
Go To C
*
A maximum of two Announcements can be recorded in Monolingual Mode. In Bilingual Mode, two Announcements can be recorded in the Primary
Language and two Announcements can be recorded in the Secondary Language.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Flowchart
D
2, Line Coverage to see if VMS-
AA is specified for any lines.
Use Group Call Distribution (#206)*
Yes to assign VMS-AA lines to Hunt
Group 7.
C 3
No
2, to check VMS Hunt Delay and
VMS Hunt Schedule settings for
the PARTNER MAIL VS system.
●
●
●
●
Go To E
Leave VMS Hunt Delay (#506) at
factory setting (Immediate)
Leave VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) at
factory setting (Always)
Program a Night Service Button
(#503) at extension 10
C 9
Go To E
Set Automatic Extension Privacy
(#304) to Assigned for the VMS
Yes
Yes
If Immediate and Always are
checked, this site uses immediate
call handling all the time (day and
night).
extensions.
C10
●
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) at
Delayed
No
C 5
●
●
Leave VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) at
factory setting (Always)
Program a Night Service Button
Go To E
If Delayed and Always are
checked, this site uses delayed
call handling all the time (day
and night).
(#503) at extension 10
C 9
●
Leave VMS Hunt Delay (#506) at
factory setting (Immediate)
No
●
●
●
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to
Yes
If Immediate and Day Only are
checked, this site uses immediate
call handling only during the day.
Day Only
C6
Go To E
Program a Night Service Button
(#503) at extension 10
C 9
Set Automatic Extension Privacy
(#304) to Assigned for the VMS
extensions.
C10
No
Yes
●
●
●
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to
Delayed
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507)
to Day Only
If Delayed and Day Only are
checked, this site uses delayed
call handling only during the day.
Go To E
C 6
C 9
Program a Night Service
Button (#503) at extension 10
C10
No
●
●
Yes
Leave VMS Hunt Delay (#506) at
factory setting (Immediate)
If Immediate and Night Only are
checked, this site uses immediate
call handling only during the night.
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507) to
Go To E
Day Only
C 6
●
●
Program a Night Service Button
(#503) at extension 10
C 9
Set Automatic Extension Privacy
(#304) to Assigned for the VMS
extensions.
C10
No
●
Yes
Set VMS Hunt Delay (#506) to
Delayed
If Delayed and Night Only are
checked, this site uses delayed
call handling only during the night.
C 5
C6
C9
●
●
Go To E
Set VMS Hunt Schedule (#507)
to Night Only
Program a Night Service
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check
the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
Button (#503) at extension 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
Yes
Coverage to see if any lines are
Use Group Call Distribution (#206)* to
program the personal lines as VMS
checked off in the VMS-Mail column.
Line Coverage for Hunt Group 7.
C3
D to assign Line Ownership to
specified lines.
V24
No
Yes
Use Line Coverage Extension (#208)
to program line ownership for those
Coverage to see if any extension
numbers are specified in the VMS-
Mail column.
extensions.
C 4
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Automatic VMS Cover (#310) is
assigned for any extensions.
Assign Automatic VMS Cover (#310)
to those extensions.
C 7
No
Use VMS Cover Rings (#117) to
see if a different number of VMS
Cover Rings (#117)† is specified.
program the number of rings.
C 8
No
Program a VMS Cover button on
the system phone at those
VMS Cover button is specified for any
extensions.
extensions.
C11
No
Program a Do Not Disturb button on
the system phone at each of those
Do Not Disturb button is specified for
any extensions.
extensions.
C12
No
Program a Voice Mailbox Transfer
button on the system phone at those
Voice Mailbox Transfer button is
specified for any extensions.
extensions.
C13
No
Program a Voice Mail Messages
button on all subscribers’ system
phones for one-touch access to the
voice messaging system.
C14
*
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the
Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
No
†
VMS Cover Rings (#117) may not be available on your system. Check the Programming and
Use guide for the communications system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference
To Program the PARTNER MAIL VS System
TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING
MAIN MENU
TO REPLAY A MENU
TO START PROGRAMMING
PRESS [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]
PRESS [ 9 ] [ 9 ] and [ # ]
PRESS [
★
] [ 4 ]
PRESS [
★
] [ 7 ]
ENTER your Password
(factory setting is 1234) and [ # ]
PRESS [ 9 ] to access the Programming
TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU
TO EXIT PROGRAMMING
PRESS [
★
] [ # ]
PRESS [
★
] [
★
] [ 9 ]
Main Menu
Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant
Language
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated
PRESS [ 1 ] to program Language
Attendant Service
Attendant Service
TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE
TRANSFER TO DIRECT EXTENSION
TRANSFER—MONOLINGUAL MODE
TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION
AND DAY MENU PROMPT—
MONOLINGUAL MODE
TO MODIFY THE LANGUAGE MODE
PRESS [ 1 ] for Language Mode
PRESS [ 1 ] for Monolingual Mode or
[ 2 ] for Bilingual Mode
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify
V1
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify
PRESS [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer
TO MODIFY THE SYSTEM
LANGUAGE—MONOLINGUAL MODE
PRESS [ 2 ] for System Language
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
ENTER the number of the desired
System Language
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm
PRESS [ 1 ] for Selector Code Transfer
To program another Selector Code for
Direct Extension Transfer,
repeat
ENTER an extension, Hunt Group, or
Calling Group number and [ # ]
To program another Selector Code for
Selector Code Transfer, repeat
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
Prompt
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
V2
Prompt
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve all changes
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
V12
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve all changes
TO MODIFY THE PRIMARY AND
SECONDARY LANGUAGES—
BILINGUAL MODE
V 4
TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE
TRANSFER TO ANNOUNCEMENT—
MONOLINGUAL MODE
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
PRESS [ 2 ] for System Language
PRESS [ 1 ] for Primary Language
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
ENTER the number of the desired
System Language
TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT—
MONOLINGUAL MODE
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify
PRESS [ 3 ] for Announcement
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm
PRESS [ 3 ] to play the Announcement
PRESS [
★
] [ # ]
ENTER an Announcement number
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Announcement
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [ 2 ] for Secondary Language
recorded for the Selector Code
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
ENTER the number of the desired
System Language
ENTER an Announcement number
PRESS [ 1 ] to rerecord the
Announcement
PRESS [
PRESS [
★
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm
] [ # ] to continue without
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
V3
programming another Selector
PRESS [
PRESS [
★
★
] [ # ] to move up a menu level
] [ # ] to continue without
Code, or
To program another Selector Code,
repeat
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu
Prompt
programming Selector Codes
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes
V10
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve all changes
V14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference
To Program the PARTNER MAIL VS System
TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING
MAIN MENU
TO REPLAY A MENU
TO START PROGRAMMING
PRESS [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]
PRESS [ 9 ] [ 9 ] and [ # ]
PRESS [
★
] [ 4 ]
PRESS [
★
] [ 7 ]
ENTER your Password
(factory setting is 1234) and [ # ]
PRESS [ 9 ] to access the Programming
TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU
TO EXIT PROGRAMMING
PRESS [
★
] [ # ]
PRESS [
★
] [
★
] [ 9 ]
Main Menu
Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant
Automated Attendant
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated
Attendant Service
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated
Attendant Service
Attendant Service
TO MODIFY ANNOUNCEMENT—
BILINGUAL MODE
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE
TRANSFER TO ANNOUNCEMENT—
BILINGUAL MODE
TO MODIFY THE MENU DEFINITION
AND DAY MENU PROMPT—
BILINGUAL MODE
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify
PRESS [ 3 ] for Announcement
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
ENTER a Selector Code [ 1 ] through [ 9 ]
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm
PRESS [ 3 ] to play the Announcement
recorded for the Selector Code
PRESS [ 1 ] for Selector Code Transfer
ENTER an Announcement number
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Announcement
ENTER an Announcement number
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Announcement
in the Primary Language
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
ENTER an extension, Hunt Group, or
Calling Group number and [ # ]
in the Primary Language
To program another Selector Code for
Selector Code Transfer, repeat
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Announcement
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu
Prompt in the Primary
Language
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Announcement
in the Secondary Language
in the Secondary Language
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [
PRESS [
PRESS [
★
★
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve the
Announcements
] [ # ] to continue without
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
] [ # ] to move up a menu level
] [ # ] to move up another menu
PRESS [
★
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu
Prompt in the Secondary
Language
programming another Selector
Code, or
level
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes V11
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to program another
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
Selector Code, repeat
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
TO CHANGE SELECTOR CODE
TRANSFER TO DIRECT EXTENSION
TRANSFER—BILINGUAL MODE
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes
Prompt in the Primary Language
V5
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu
Prompt in the Secondary
Language
ENTER a Selector Code 1 through 9
PRESS [ 9 ] to modify
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [ 5 ] for Direct Extension Transfer
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve-
To program another Selector Code for
Direct Extension Transfer,
repeat
V15
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION–
MONOLINGUAL MODE
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Day Menu
Prompt in the Primary Language
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [ 2 ] for playback of the
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
Day Menu definition
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Day Menu
Prompt in the Secondary
Language
PRESS [ 2 ] for playback of the Selector
Codes
PRESS [ 1 ] to play the recorded
Announcement assigned to the
Selector Code, or
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes
V6
PRESS [ # ] to skip
V13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference
To Program The PARTNER MAIL VS System
TO RETURN TO THE PROGRAMMING
MAIN MENU
TO REPLAY A MENU
TO START PROGRAMMING
PRESS [ Intercom ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]
PRESS [ 9 ] [ 9 ] and [ # ]
PRESS [
★
] [ 4 ]
PRESS [
★
] [ 7 ]
ENTER your Password
TO RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MENU
(factory setting is 1234) and [ # ]
TO EXIT PROGRAMMING
PRESS [
★
] [ # ]
PRESS [ 9 ] to access the Programming
PRESS [
★
] [
★
] [ 9
]
Main Menu
Line Ownership
Mailboxes
Automated Attendant
PRESS [ 6 ] to program Line Ownership
PRESS [ 4 ] to program Mailboxes
PRESS [ 3 ] to program Automated
Attendant Service
TO SCAN LINE OWNERSHIP
TO PLAY A MAILBOX’S STATUS
PRESS [ 2 ] to scan
ENTER a mailbox number and [ # ], or
TO PLAY THE MENU DEFINITION–
BILINGUAL MODE
PRESS [ 1 ] for Day Menu
PRESS [ # ] for the first mailbox
ENTER the line number and [ # ], or
PRESS [ # ] to scan the first line
number that has an owner
PRESS [ # ] to play the next existing
V16
mailbox’s status
PRESS [ 2 ] for playback of the
Day Menu definition
PRESS [ 2 ] for playback of the Selector
LISTEN to the line owner’s name and
mailbox number
TO DELETE A MAILBOX
ENTER a mailbox number and [ # ]
PRESS [ # ] to scan the next line
Codes
V23
PRESS [ 1 ] to play the Primary Language
Announcement assigned to the
Selector Code, or
PRESS [
★
] [ 3 ] to delete the mailbox
V17
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm
TO ASSIGN LINE OWNERSHIP
PRESS [ 4 ] to assign
ENTER the line number and [ # ]
ENTER the mailbox number and [ # ]
PRESS [ 2 ] to play the Secondary
Language Announcement
assigned to the Selector Code,
or
TO CREATE A MAILBOX
ENTER the new mailbox number and [ # ]
PRESS [ 4 ] to create the new mailbox
V24
PRESS [ # ] to skip
V18
V 7
TO MODIFY LINE OWNERSHIP
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
ENTER the line number and [ # ]
TO REINITIALIZE A PASSWORD
ENTER a mailbox number and [ # ]
PRESS [ 3 ] to reset the password to 1234
V19
TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU
PROMPT—MONOLINGUAL MODE
PRESS [ 2 ] for Night Menu
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
ENTER the new owner’s mailbox
number and [ # ]
V25
V26
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Night Menu
Prompt
TO REINITIALIZE A MAILBOX
ENTER the mailbox number and [ # ]
PRESS [ 4 ] to reinitialize the mailbox
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
TO DELETE LINE OWNERSHIP
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [
★
] [ 3 ] to delete
V 8
V20
ENTER the line number and [ # ]
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm
TO MODIFY THE NIGHT MENU
PROMPT—BILINGUAL MODE
TO MODIFY A MAILBOX’S LANGUAGE
ENTER the mailbox number and [ # ]
PRESS [ 6 ] to program Language
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
PRESS [ 2 ] for Night Menu
PRESS [ 6 ] to modify
PRESS [ 1 ] to record the Night Menu
ENTER the number of the desired
language
Prompt in the Primary Language
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
PRESS [ ] [ # ] to approve
V21
PRESS [ 9 ] to confirm
★
PRESS [ 2 ] to record the Night Menu Prompt
TO ASSIGN/REMOVE OUTCALLING
FOR A MAILBOX
in the Secondary Language
PRESS [ 1 ] after recording
ENTER the mailbox number and [ # ]
PRESS [ 5 ] to administer Outcalling
PRESS [ 9 ] to assign Outcalling, or
PRESS [ 6 ] to remove Outcalling
PRESS [
★
] [ # ] to approve
PRESS [ # ] to approve all changes
V9
To assign/remove Outcalling for another
mailbox, repeat
V22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference
To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS
Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10*
TO START SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ]
TO USE A SPECIFIC PROCEDURE
TO CYCLE THROUGH AVAILABLE
SETTINGS
DIAL
[ # ] and three-digit procedure
code
PRESS [ Next Data ] or [ Prev Data ]
PRESS [ System Program ]
Example: [ # ] [ 5 ] [ 0 ] [ 5 ] for Hunt Group
PRESS [ System Program ]
Extensions
ENTER System Password if required
TO RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS
PRESS [ Remove ]
TO CYCLE THROUGH SYSTEM
PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES
TO END SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
PRESS [ Next Procedure ] or
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ]
[ Prev Procedure ]
AUTOMATIC VMS COVER
HUNT GROUP EXTENSIONS
GROUP CALL DISTRIBUTION
DIAL
#206††
DIAL
DIAL
DIAL
DIAL
#505
#310
an extension number
PRESS [ 7 ] for the VMS Hunt Group
PRESS [ 7 ] for the VMS Hunt Group
DIAL
DIAL
1
2
= Assigned
= Not Assigned
the extension number
a line number
✔
DIAL
DIAL
1 = Assigned to group
1
2
3
= Assigned
= Not Assigned
= VMS Line Cover
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another
2 = Not assigned to group ✔
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program the next
extension
✔
C 7
extension
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another
line
C1
VMS COVER RINGS
C3
DIAL
DIAL
#117**
TRANSFER RETURN EXTENSION
one digit (1-9) for the number of
rings before the call is sent to
the voice messaging system)
#306†
LINE COVERAGE EXTENSION
DIAL
DIAL
DIAL
DIAL
#208**
a line number
an extension number
DIAL
DIAL
the extension number
10 (the receptionist’s extension)
✔
= 3 rings
C 8
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program the next
extension
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another
line
NIGHT SERVICE BUTTON
C 2
PRESS [ Remove ] to unassign ownership
DIAL
DIAL
#503
C4
1
2
= Assigned
= Not Assigned
✔
3 = Select button** then PRESS
a programmable button (to
assign Night Service to that
button)
VMS HUNT DELAY
DIAL
#506
DIAL
1 = Immediate ✔
2 = Delayed
If you use option 3 after a Night
Service button has been assigned,
the Night Service button moves
from the old button to the new
button you select.
C5
VMS HUNT SCHEDULE
C 9
DIAL
DIAL
#507
1
= Always
✔
2 = Day Only
AUTOMATIC EXTENSION PRIVACY
3 = Night Only
DIAL
DIAL
DIAL
#304
C 6
the extension number
1 = Assigned
2
= Not Assigned
✔
PRESS [ Next Item ] to program another
extension
✔
= Factory Setting
C10
= Button with Lights Required
*
Some systems allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
†
In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications
system.
††
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
**
Line Coverage Extension (#208), VMS Cover Rings (#117), and option 3 of the Night Service Button (#503) procedure may not be available on your
system. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARTNER MAIL VS® System Programming Reference
To Program the Communications System for PARTNER MAIL VS
Place the Programming Overlay on the dial pad of the system display phone at extension 10*
TO ERASE A FEATURE OR AUTO
DIAL BUTTON
PRESS the programmed button
TO PROGRAM ANOTHER FEATURE
AT THE SAME EXTENSION
After you program one feature, continue
with the instructions in the box for the
next feature.
TO START CENTRALIZED
TELEPHONE PROGRAMMING
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ]
PRESS [ Mic ]
PRESS [ System Program ] [ System Program ]
PRESS [ Central Tel Program ]
DIAL
TO END CENTRALIZED TELEPHONE
PROGRAMMING
the extension number to be
programmed
TO CHANGE SETTINGS FOR
ANOTHER EXTENSION
Buttons on which lines are assigned for the
extension light up to show the current Line
Ringing setting; remaining buttons can be
programmed with Auto Dial numbers or
features.
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 0 ]
PRESS [ Central Tel Program ]
DIAL
the new extension’s number
VOICE MAIL MESSAGES AUTO DIAL
BUTTON
PRESS a programmable button
VOICE MAILBOX TRANSFER
PRESS a programmable button
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 4 ]††
VMS COVER
PRESS a programmable button with
lights
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 1 ] [ 5 ]†
PRESS left [ Intercom ]
C13
[ 7 ] [ 7 ] [ 7 ]
DIAL
C11
C14
DO NOT DISTURB
PRESS a programmable button with
lights
PRESS [ Feature ] [ 0 ] [ 1 ]
C12
= Button with Lights Required
*
Some systems allow programming from extension 11. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
†
In some countries, the procedure code for Transfer Return Extension is #309. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications
system.
††
In some countries, the procedure code for Group Call Distribution is #205. Check the Programming and Use guide for the communications system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
